Copyright: Copyright 1998 Adobe Systems Incorportated


Adobe PhotoDeluxe Business Edition

What would you like to know more about?

Overview

PhotoDeluxe Business Basics

Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business

Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business

Organizing your photos

Making a selection

Working with layers

Touching up a photo

Painting and editing tools

Resizing and orientation

Adjusting the quality of a photo

Using special effects

Commands

Troubleshooting


Help Authors


PhotoDeluxe Business Basics

Click any of the following topics to learn about the fundamentals of Adobe® PhotoDeluxe™ Business Edition:

Overview

Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business

Creating a blank, untitled picture

Saving your work

Setting preferences

Zooming

Getting around your photo

Using rulers

Undoing mistakes

Using menus

Using long menus

Holding a photo

Deleting a photo from Hold Photo

Using templates


Overview
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Overview

In general, these are the main activities you will do in Adobe® PhotoDeluxe™ Business Edition.

Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business

PhotoDeluxe Business is organized so that the most important tools are in front of you when you need them. Step-by-step guided activities make projects easy. For more information, see Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business.

Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business

PhotoDeluxe Business works with photos that are already stored as digital files. If your photos are in prints, slides, or negatives, they're not digital yet. For more information, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

Touching up a photo

Not all photos are perfect right out of the camera. That's why touching up is one of the most common photo activities. For more information, see Touching up a photo.

Adding text

You can add text to a photo using the Text tool. You can color, move, resize, and distort text. For more information, see Adding text to a photo.

Extending PhotoDeluxe Business with the Web

You can connect to a world of additional tips, techniques, technical assistance, and up-to-date resources over the World Wide Web—all at no extra cost. For more information, see Extending PhotoDeluxe Business with the Web.

Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business

When you finish working on a photo, you can save the photo to your hard disk, another program, or another computer. Or, you can prepare it for the Web or print it. For more information, see Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business.

Marking areas with selection tools

When you want to change just a part of a photo, you must first tell PhotoDeluxe Business which area to change by selecting it. When you use a selection, your next action will change the photo inside the selected area only. For more information, see Making a selection.

Exploring advanced features

You can use the advanced features when you've mastered the Guided Activities and you want to do something completely original and personal. These features are the same ones you can use within Guided Activities, except that you can use them in any order you want. For more information, see Exploring advanced features.

Combining photos using layers

A layer is like a clear sheet on which you can place a photo, add text, or paint. Layers are stacked on top of each other, and you can see through blank areas of a layer to the layers below. For more information, see Working with layers.


Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business

PhotoDeluxe Business is organized so that the most important tools are in front of you when you need them. Step-by-step guided activities make projects easy.

Click any part of the picture below to get more information about it:

See also:

Looking at the My Photos organizer

Looking at the Layers palette

Looking at the Selections palette

Exploring advanced features


Intro tabs

Introduction (Intro) tabs provide an overview of what the section or guided activity does.


Numbered tabs

Numbered tabs guide you through steps in order.


Clue cards

Clue cards guide you with information about a step.


Hold photo

When you want to combine photos or use selections from different photos (for example, when making a collage), you can store up to 20 photos in a special folder on your hard disk called the Hold Photo folder. The photos appear as thumbnails in the Hold Photo area of the PhotoDeluxe Business window. For more information, see Holding a photo.


Help buttons in steps

Help buttons provide specific information within steps.


Status bar

The status bar tells you how much memory your photo uses. For complete information about the status bar, see Looking at the status bar.


Exploring advanced features
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Exploring advanced features

As you gain experience with photo editing, you can go beyond the built-in guided activities. You can use advanced features to enhance a guided activity when you want to do something completely original and personal. When you click the Advanced button, you are presented with tabs of effects you can apply (without following steps, menu options, and tabs) to access touch-up and editing tools.


Advanced button

The Advanced button presents tabs of effects you can apply (without following steps, menu options, and tabs) to access touch-up and editing tools. You can use the advanced features when you've mastered the Guided Activities and you want to do something completely original and personal. These features are the same ones you can use within Guided Activities, except that you can use them in any order you want.


Long menus

To keep long menus on when the Advanced button is not selected, choose File > Preferences > Long Menus.


Help button

The online Help button in the photo window is available in both guided activities and in Advanced mode. For information on using Help, see How to use Help.


Get & Fix Photo button

Click this button and follow the instructions on-screen to locate, display, and touch up the photo you want to use. You can get a photo from devices (scanners, video or digital cameras, or disks) or open photos you downloaded from the Internet or received over e-mail. For related information, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.


Special Effects button

Click this button and follow the instructions on-screen to spice up your photos with dazzling effects. For related information, see Using special effects.


Projects button

Click this button and follow the instructions on-screen to use your photos in useful projects such as business cards, calendars, letterhead stationery, coupons, flyers, Web graphics, T-shirts, and more.


Internet button

Click this button and follow the instructions on-screen to get tips, techniques, technical help, activities, Adobe Connectables, and other resources online if you have a connection to the Internet.

Note: To use the Internet features, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 installed.


Send & Save button

Click this button and follow the instructions on-screen to send the photo on your screen to a printer, to a disk, through e-mail, to another application, or you can prepare it for a Web page. For related information, see Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business.


Advanced button

The Advanced button presents tabs of effects you can apply (without following steps, menu options, and tabs) to access touch-up and editing tools.


Zoom-in button

Click to see more detail in your photo. For related information, see Zooming.


Zoom-out button

Click to view more of your photo in the window. For related information, see Zooming.


Zoom tool

Click to select the Zoom tool, and then click or drag in your photo to zoom in on a particular portion. For related information, see Zooming.


Zoom pop-up menu

Click to display the Zoom menu, and then choose a magnification level. For related information, see Zooming.


Trash Can button

Click to delete a photo object or the current selection. For more information, see Making a selection and Deleting a selection.


Object-order menu button

Click to display the Object-order menu, and then choose an option for moving the selected object forward or backward. For more information, see About layers and Rearranging the order of layers.


Text button

Click to add new text to your photo. For more information, see Adding text to a photo.


Help button

Click to see the contents of this Help file. From there, you can find the topic you need. For information on using Help, see Help on Help.


Undo button

Click to reverse the last operation you performed (or redo an operation that you chose to undo). For more details, see Undoing mistakes.


Looking at the My Photos organizer
Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business
Looking at the My Photos organizer

The My Photos organizer window displays photos in categories called galleries. When you store a photo in a gallery, you see a thumbnail of the photo in the gallery. You can drag a photo from any gallery to the PhotoDeluxe Business work area or to a word-processor document.

Click any part of the picture below to get more information about it.


Gallery tab

Click a gallery tab to see the thumbnail (miniature representation) of each photo in that gallery. For related information, see Creating a new gallery.


Thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature representation of a photo stored in a gallery. Click the thumbnail of the photo you want to use, and then drag it to the PhotoDeluxe Business work area or to another document. For related information, see About the photo organizer.


Title

Click to get information about the stored photo, including its caption, filename, and location. For related information, see Adding a title to a photo.


Looking at the Layers palette
Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business
Looking at the Layers palette

Creating photo collages and other effects is much easier with layers. The Layers palette shows all the layers in a photo and provides tools for adding, removing, and rearranging layers. For more information on layers, see About layers.

Note: When you are working in a guided activity, the Layers palette is not available. Before you can change layers, you must complete the guided activity by clicking the Done tab.

To see the Layers palette:

Do one of the following:

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Show Layers. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

Click an element in the Layers palette below to get more information about it.

Notice that the arrow in the upper right corner opens the Layers palette menu.


Layers palette menu

Click to see a menu of options for adding, deleting, and merging layers. For more details, see Creating a layered picture, Deleting a layer, Merging layers.


Layer name

Each layer shows a thumbnail (miniature representation) of the layer, along with its name. Double-click to change the name or to set opacity and blending options. For more details about opacity and blending, see Blending layers and Selecting a blending mode.


New layer icon

Creates a new layer.

•  To create a new layer and set options for that layer, click this icon.

•  To create a new layer without setting options (using default options), Alt+click this icon.

•  To create a copy of a layer, drag an existing layer name to this icon.

For more details, see Creating a layered picture and Duplicating a layer.


Trash Can icon

Drag an existing layer name in the Layers palette to this icon to delete that layer. For more details, see Deleting a layer.


Eye icon

Click the leftmost column of the Layers palette to hide or display the layer whose name appears to the right. When the eye is visible, the layer is visible; when the eye is hidden, the layer is hidden. For more details, see Viewing a layer.


Looking at the Selections palette
Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business
Looking at the Selections palette

The Selections palette provides the tools you need to determine precisely what parts of your photo you will change. For example, if you want to copy part of a photo and paste it onto a different background, you have to select the part of the photo you want before you copy it.

To see the Selections palette:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the View Selections button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Show Selections.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

The New, Add, Reduce, and Move buttons are not available if the Object selection tool is active. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

Click an object in the Selections palette below to get more information about it.


Selection Tools menu

Click to choose a selection tool—Object selection tool, Polygon tool, Trace tool, Rectangle tool, Oval tool, Square tool, Circle tool, Color Wand, and SmartSelect tool. For more help, see Making a selection.


New button

Click to start a new selection. For more help, see Making a selection. Note that the buttons (New, Add, Reduce, Move) are not available when the Object selection tool is displayed.


Add button

Click the Add button, and then select an area to add to your original selection. For more details, see Adding to or removing sections from a selection. Note that the buttons (New, Add, Reduce, Move) are not available when the Object selection tool is displayed.


Reduce button

Click the Reduce button, and then select an area to remove from your original selection. For more details, see Adding to or removing sections from a selection. Note that the buttons (New, Add, Reduce, Move) are not available when the Object selection tool is displayed.


Move button

Click to move a selection or layer. For more details, see Moving a layer. Note that the buttons (New, Add, Reduce, Move) are not available when the Object selection tool is displayed.


All button

Click to select the entire layer or photo. For more details, see Selecting and deselecting an entire photo.


None button

Click to deselect the entire layer or photo. For more details, see Selecting and deselecting an entire photo.


Invert button

Click to deselect the selected areas and select the unselected areas of a layer or photo. For more details, see Selecting the unselected areas of a photo.


Looking at the status bar
Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business
Looking at the status bar

The status bar at the bottom left of the PhotoDeluxe Business window displays the file size for the currently active photo window. The number indicates the size of the photo in memory or, in other words, the size of the file as it would be sent to the printer. Hold the mouse button down on this number to see a display of the photo's dimensions and resolution. For more details, see Displaying the file size, dimensions, and resolution of a photo.


Information area

Hold the mouse button down on the status bar to display a pop-up window listing the photo's dimensions and resolution.


Creating a blank, untitled picture
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Creating a blank, untitled picture

You can create a blank, untitled PhotoDeluxe Business picture by using the New command in the File menu. When you choose this command, the New dialog box appears. This dialog box lets you name the picture and set the width, height, and resolution.

If you previously used the Cut or Copy command on a photo or selection, that image is held in a temporary storage area called the Clipboard. If the Clipboard contains an image when you choose New, the default dimensions and resolution displayed in the New dialog box correspond to the size of the Clipboard image. This ensures a perfect fit if you paste the image in the new picture.

To create a blank, untitled picture:

1  Choose File > New. For more help, see Using menus. If you want PhotoDeluxe Business to ignore Clipboard information when you create a new picture, hold down Alt as you choose File > New.

2  Type a name for your picture, if desired.

3  Use the menus next to Width and Height to choose a unit of measure. Then type the width and height for your picture.

4  Type the resolution you want the picture to have. For examples of common resolutions and their purposes, see Getting the best size for printing. Then click OK.


Saving your work
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Saving your work

It's good practice to save frequently to avoid accidentally losing any work. The Save command saves your photos in the PhotoDeluxe Business format.

•  To save a copy of a photo with a different filename, choose File > Save As > PhotoDeluxe.

•  To save a file in a different format (such as GIF or JPEG), see Choosing a file format.

•  To save a photo in the My Photos gallery, see Adding a photo to a gallery.

To save your work:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, and then click the Save button.

•  Choose File > Save. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Press Ctrl+S.

2  Select a location for your file. For information on opening and creating folders, refer to your Windows documentation.

3  Type a name for the file.

4  Click Save.

See also:

Choosing a file format


Setting preferences
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Setting preferences

PhotoDeluxe Business allows you to customize many program settings, which are stored in a preferences file. The settings stored in this file include general display options, ruler units, and options for turning Clue cards on and off. You set most of these options in dialog boxes that you open through the Preferences menu in the File menu.

See also:

Restoring default preferences

Turn on/off All Clue cards

Cursors

Plug-ins

Scratch Disks

Background

Units

Copying a selection between applications

Using Long Menus


Zooming
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Zooming

When you zoom in on a photo, you don't actually change its size—you just change your view of it. You can magnify and reduce up to 16 times the original view of the photo. You have three ways to change the zoom level of a photo in PhotoDeluxe Business:

•  Click a zoom button or command

•  Use the Zoom tool

•  Select a magnification percentage

To magnify the view (see more detail):

Do one of the following:

•  Click the [image] button at the top of the photo window.

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Zoom In. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

The magnification level is displayed to the right of the Zoom tool.

To reduce the view (see more of your photo):

Do one of the following:

•  Click the [image] button at the top of the photo window.

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Zoom Out.

The magnification level is displayed to the right of the Zoom tool.

To zoom in on a particular portion of a photo:

1  Click the Zoom tool [image] at the top of the photo window.

2  Click or drag over an area you want to magnify. As you drag, a box shows the area that will be magnified.

As with the zoom buttons, the magnification level is displayed to the right of the Zoom tool.

To select a magnification percentage:

1  Click the arrow next to the magnification level [image].

2  Select a magnification level from the menu.

When you display a photo at 100%, one photo pixel corresponds to one monitor pixel. As a result, the size you see on-screen depends on your monitor resolution and on the image resolution of the photo. For related information, see Monitor resolution and Image resolution.


Getting around your photo
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Getting around your photo

If your view of a photo is bigger than the photo window, scroll bars automatically appear along the bottom and right sides of the window. You can click in the scroll bars to control what appears in the photo window. In addition, you can reposition a photo quickly by using the Hand tool.

To reposition a photo with the Hand tool:

1  Hold down the spacebar to change the cursor to the Hand tool.

2  Drag in the photo until you see the part of the photo you want to view.


Using rulers
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Using rulers

You can display rulers along the top and left sides of the currently active photo window. When rulers are visible and you move the pointer into the active window, markers appear on the rulers to indicate the pointer's current position.

To display rulers:

With long menus displayed, choose View > Show Rulers or press Ctrl+R. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

To hide the rulers:

With long menus displayed, choose View > Hide Rulers or press Ctrl+R.

To change the rulers' zero origin:

1  Position the cursor in the upper-left corner of the window, directly under the title bar.

2  Hold down the mouse button and drag onto the photo.

A set of cross hairs appears, marking the new origin on the rulers.

Changing the ruler origin lets you measure from a specific point on the photo.

To reset the ruler origin to the default value:

Double-click the upperleft corner of the rulers.

For information on changing the rulers' unit of measurement, see Units.


Undoing  mistakes
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Undoing mistakes

You don't need to be overly concerned about making mistakes while using PhotoDeluxe Business. You can undo most operations with the Undo button at the top of the photo window.

Note: You can undo only the last action performed.

To reverse the last action performed:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Undo button immediately after performing the action.

•  Choose Edit > Undo. For more information, see Using menus.

•  Click the photo window with the right mouse button, and then click Undo.

•  Press Ctrl+Z.

To redo an action you just reversed:

Click the Undo button again or choose Edit > Redo.

To reverse a series of unsaved changes:

Choose File > Revert to Last Saved.

All changes made since the last save are lost. This is the same as closing the file without saving changes and then opening it again. Note that this will not work if you are working on a new, untitled photo. In that case, you should save the photo to your hard disk before making changes. For related information, see Saving your work.


Using menus
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Using menus

Each Help screen you see in PhotoDeluxe Home uses a quick way to refer to menus in which the menus—and commands they contain—are separated by the greater than symbol (>).

For example:

"Choose Select > Selection Tools > Polygon" means to select the menus shown below:

In the same way, when you see "Choose Help > Contents," it means to choose Help on the menu bar and then choose Contents.


Using long menus
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Using long menus

You can use menus to perform most tasks in PhotoDeluxe Business. Displaying long menus lets you use all available commands. For a project or activity that involves many steps and tasks, there may not be a corresponding command.

To show long menus:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button.

•  Choose File > Preferences > Long Menus. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Long Menus.

Choosing the Long Menus command causes long menus to appear even if the Advanced button is not clicked.

To hide long menus:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Preferences > Short Menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Short Menus.

This causes long menus to disappear unless the Advanced button is pressed.


Holding a photo
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Holding a photo

When you want to combine photos or use selections from different photos (for example, when making a collage), you can store up to 20 photos in a special folder on your hard disk called the Hold Photo folder. The photos appear as thumbnails in the Hold Photo area of the PhotoDeluxe Business window, located on the left side of the screen below the buttons.

  You don't need to put a photo on hold to work with more than one photo. You can also open multiple photos at the same time for easy copying and pasting between them.

To put a photo on hold:

1  Choose File > Send To > Hold Photo. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Type a name for the photo and click OK.

To retrieve a held photo:

Do one of the following:

•  In the Hold Photo area, double-click the photo you want.

•  Drag the photo you want from the Hold Photo area to the photo window (if one is open) or to the work space.

If a photo was already open, the photo you retrieved from Hold Photo becomes a new layer in the photo window. If the retrieved photo is larger than the existing photo, PhotoDeluxe Business resizes the retrieved photo to fit the existing photo. If you drag a photo into a preset location in a template, the photo will resize to fit the location.

See also:

About layers

Selecting a blending mode

Deleting a photo from Hold Photo


Deleting a photo from Hold Photo
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Deleting a photo from Hold Photo

Because PhotoDeluxe Business saves held photos to your hard disk, it's important to delete held photos that you no longer need. A warning message suggesting that you delete a photo will appear if you have more than 20 photos in the Hold Photo folder.

To delete a photo from Hold Photo:

1  Select the photo you want to delete.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Press the Delete key.

•  Choose Edit > Delete From Hold Photo, and then click the Delete button.

•  Click the photo using the right mouse button, choose Delete From Hold Photo, and then click Delete.

When you delete the last photo in Hold Photo, the Hold Photo area disappears.


Using templates
PhotoDeluxe Business Basics
Using templates

In addition to numerous sample photos and clip art, PhotoDeluxe Business includes hundreds of templates—collections of layouts, fonts, and colors with a cohesive design. After you touch up and customize your photos, simply drop them into templates to create business stationery, direct mail pieces, Web pages, and more.

Some templates include layouts and color schemes that work well with other templates. When you choose those templates, you can create a family of documents (such as business cards, stationery, and envelopes) for a strong identity.

To create documents using templates, you start with a guided activity, which takes you step-by-step through creating a finished project. Templates on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM will get you going. When you're ready for more project ideas, you can use Adobe Connectables software to retrieve new guided activities and templates from the Web. For more information, see Extending PhotoDeluxe Business with the Web.

Note: For some PhotoDeluxe Business templates, a specific Avery paper stock is chosen by default. This is the paper stock that the template is designed for but you can change it by choosing another paper. For complete information on Avery paper, see Avery paper stock.

To use a template:

1  Click the Projects button, and read the information under the Intro tab.

2  Click the tab for the project you want to create, and follow the step-by-step tabs.

See also:

Troubleshooting fonts in templates


Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business

Click any of the following topics to learn how to get a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business:

Opening a photo from a hard disk

Opening a photo from a photo organizer window

Opening a photo from the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM

Opening a photo from a digital camera

Scanning a photo

About scanners and digital cameras

Opening a Photo CD file

Opening a photo from a diskette

Opening a photo from a video source

Opening clip art

Opening a photo from a photo-finishing service diskette

Opening a photo from an Internet photo service

Opening a photo received from another computer


Opening a photo from a hard disk
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from a hard disk

You can use the Open File button or command to open photos you have already saved on your hard disk.

PhotoDeluxe Business opens a file in the PhotoDeluxe Business file format. If you open a file that hasn't been saved in this format, PhotoDeluxe Business automatically converts it and opens it as "Untitled." Your original file remains untouched. When you save the new file using the Save As command, PhotoDeluxe Business saves it in its own format. For related information, see Opening a photo from the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM.

To open a file:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Open File button.

•  Choose File > Open File. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Locate and select the file you want.

If the file you want to open was previously saved in the PhotoDeluxe Business format, you will see a thumbnail preview of the photo after selecting it in the file list.

3  To make the list show only the files saved in a particular format, choose the format from the Files of Type menu.

4  When you've selected the photo you want, click Open.

See also:

Problems opening files


Opening a photo from a photo organizer window
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from a photo organizer window

PhotoDeluxe Business includes several photo organizer windows for storing photos. The photo organizer groups photos in a gallery. The Samples and Clip Art windows display thumbnails representing project material stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM. A fourth window, My Photos, shows thumbnails for your own photos and projects.

Each photo organizer window lets you view and open photos from a gallery. Only the My Photos window lets you add, delete, and arrange photos.

To open a photo from a photo organizer window:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos, Sample Photos, or Clip Art button.

Note: For Sample Photos or Clip Art, make sure that the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM is in the CD-ROM drive.

2  Click a gallery tab to see the thumbnail of each photo in that gallery.

3  Drag a photo from the gallery to the work area, or double-click the thumbnail image.

Note: You can also click the thumbnail using the right mouse button and choose Open Photo in PhotoDeluxe.

See also:

Looking at the My Photos organizer

Organizing your photos

Opening clip art

Opening a photo from the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM


Opening a photo from the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM

You can use the Get & Fix Photo button or command to open one of the sample photos or clip art on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM.

To open a sample photo:

1  Make sure the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM is in the CD-ROM drive.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Sample Photos button or Clip Art button.

•  Choose File > Open Special > Get Sample Photo. For more help, see Using menus.

3  Click a gallery tab to see the thumbnail of each photo in that gallery.

To see all the photos within a gallery, scroll down. If there are more gallery tabs than can be displayed, click the arrow at the far right to see more tabs.

4  Double-click the photo you want.

Note: You can also click the thumbnail using the right mouse button and choose Open Photo in PhotoDeluxe.


Opening a photo from a digital camera
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from a digital camera

You can use the Cameras button or Get Digital Photo command to open photos in PhotoDeluxe Business directly from your digital camera if your camera has an Adobe® Photoshop®-compatible plug-in module or is TWAIN-compliant. Check your camera's documentation to see if it meets either of these requirements. For related information, see About scanners and digital cameras. Consult the camera's documentation for instructions on installing the manufacturer's software and connecting the camera to your computer.

 As with most hardware, your computer should be turned off before being connected to your camera to your computer. Before you start PhotoDeluxe Business, turn on your camera.

To set up a digital camera or to select a different camera:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, and then click the Get Photo tab.

2  Try any of the following:

•  Click the arrow below the Cameras button, and then select your camera from the list (or the closest match) and click OK.

•  If your camera isn't listed, click the arrow below the Other button. If you see your camera, select it, and then click OK.

•  If you don't see your camera in either list, click the arrow below the Cameras button, select Digital Camera Direct Access, and then click OK. Click the Cameras button, and then choose your camera from the list. If you still don't see your camera, then you need to install the software that was provided with your camera.

Note: If you didn't install the software that came with your digital camera, for supported cameras, choosing Digital Camera Direct Access displays thumbnail images of the photos in your camera. (Depending on where you obtained your copy of PhotoDeluxe Business, you might not have the Digital Camera Direct Access option.)

To open a photo from a digital camera:

1  With the camera set up, do one of the following:

•  Click the Cameras button.

•  Choose File > Open Special > Get Digital Photo. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Use the software provided by your camera's manufacturer to save your photos to disk in a common image format (such as TIFF or JPEG), and then open the photos in PhotoDeluxe Business. For more information about using your camera's software, see the documentation provided with your camera. For more information about saving photos, see Saving in TIFF format or Saving in JPEG format.

Note: If you are using the Digital Camera Direct Access option, you may need to change its settings to match your camera. Click the Windows Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. Double-click Digital Camera Settings, and then change the Camera name, Type, Port, and Speed to match the settings for your camera.

3  If you downloaded the pictures to the screen, the photo will automatically open in a photo window. If you downloaded the photo to your hard disk, open it. For more information, see Opening a photo from a hard disk.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras

Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device


Scanning a photo
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Scanning a photo

You can use the Scanners button or Scan Photo command to scan a photo directly into PhotoDeluxe Business if your scanner has an Adobe® Photoshop®-compatible plug-in module or is TWAIN-compliant. Check your scanner's documentation to see if it meets either of these requirements. For related information on scanning, see About scanners and digital cameras and Preserving photo detail.

PhotoDeluxe Business has two scanning modes:

•  Guided—PhotoDeluxe Business guides you through scanning a photo and automatically sets up your scanner depending on the type of photo you are scanning.

•  Custom—You can scan the photo on your own using the scanner manufacturer's software to control the scanning process. If you don't have a flatbed scanner, use this method.

To be guided through scanning a photo:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Scanners button.

2  On the 1 Scanner tab, click Choose Scanner. Select your scanner from the list and click OK. If your scanner isn't listed, see About scanners and digital cameras.

Note: If you've already chosen a scanner, and you don't see the 1 Scanner tab, skip this step and move on to Step 3.

3  Place the photo in the middle of the scanner.

4  On the 2 Mode tab, click Guided, and then follow the numbered tabs to scan your photo.

The scanned image will automatically open in a photo window.

Note: This is the only place where PhotoDeluxe Business guides you through scanning a photo. When scanning is part of another guided activity, you scan the photo on your own using Custom scanning mode.

To scan a photo on your own using Custom scanning mode:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the arrow below the Scanners button.

2  Select your scanner from the list and click OK. If your scanner isn't listed, click the arrow below the Other button, select an option, and then click OK. For more information, see About scanners and digital cameras.

3  Place the photo on the scanner according to the scanner's documentation.

4  Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Open Special > Scan Photo. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Scanners button. On the 2 Mode tab, click Custom.

5  Use the manufacturer's software to control the scanning process. Consult the documentation included with the scanner for instructions on using this software.

•  If your photo will be printed, see Getting the best size for printing.

•  If your photo will be displayed on a monitor or on the Web, see Getting the best size for online use.

The scanned image will automatically open in a photo window.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras

Scanning issues

Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device


About scanners and digital cameras
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
About scanners and digital cameras

If you want to use PhotoDeluxe Business to open a file created on your scanner or digital camera, the scanner or camera must be TWAIN-compliant or have an Adobe Photoshop-compatible plug-in module.

To install a plug-in module, drag it into the PhotoDeluxe Business Plug-ins folder on your hard drive, and restart PhotoDeluxe Business. The plug-in modules for scanners and digital cameras appear in the list of available scanners and cameras in the Select Input Source dialog box.

If your scanner or digital camera does not have an Adobe Photoshop-compatible plug-in module or is not TWAIN-compliant, you can use the manufacturer's software to obtain your photos and then save them to your hard disk. Or, for digital cameras, you can use the Digital Camera Direct Access option to display thumbnail images of the photos in your camera.

PhotoDeluxe Business can open many different file formats, but you will probably get the best results with TIFF or BMP files. Then open the file in PhotoDeluxe Business as explained in Opening a photo from a hard disk.

Note:  Depending on where you obtained your copy of PhotoDeluxe Business, you might not have the Digital Camera Direct Access option.

See also:

Scanning a photo

Opening a photo from a digital camera

Scanning issues

Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device


Scanning issues
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Scanning issues

If you have problems scanning, check to see if any of these issues may be causing the problem.

Color Modes  If you have chosen Custom scan (instead of Guided scan), for best results, scan your photos using using the following settings: True Color RGB, 256-color grayscale, and black and white. Do not use CMYK or 256-color (8-bit). PhotoDeluxe Business converts 48-bit images, 36-bit images, 30-bit images, 256 color images, grayscale images, and 1-bit (black and white) images to 24-bit RGB images, which may increase the file size depending on the image's original color palette.

TWAIN transfer mode  For best results, use "memory buffer transfer mode." Do not use "native transfer mode" or "file transfer mode."

Paper size  If you have chosen Custom scan (instead of Guided scan), for best results, choose a specific paper size. Do not use an undefined paper size.

Resolution  For best results, use a scanner that has square pixels. Avoid scanners that have rectangular pixels, because your photo may appear distorted in PhotoDeluxe Business. Make sure you use a resolution that is appropriate for how you will use your photo. For more details, see Scanning a photo.

Scanners that don't support TWAIN  If your scanner does not support TWAIN, you will have to use the Custom scanning mode to scan your photo. (You cannot use Guided scanning mode.)

Scanners that are not flatbed  If your scanner is not a flatbed scanner, you must use the Custom scanning mode. (You cannot use the Guided scanning mode.)

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras

Scanning a photo

Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device


Opening a Photo CD file
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a Photo CD file

Use the Disc-CD button to open a photo from a Kodak® PhotoCD™. PhotoCDs provide high-quality digital photos in a convenient format. Your photo-finishing service can put up to 100 color photos or 150 black-and-white photos on a PhotoCD. For related information, see Preserving photo detail.

Note: PhotoDeluxe Business can open images from a Kodak Pro PhotoCD™, but it opens the images at the normal PhotoCD resolution, not at the higher Pro PhotoCD resolution.

To set up the Photo CD file type:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the arrow below the Disc-CD button.

2  Select Kodak Photo CD from the list and click OK.

To open a photo from a Photo CD:

1  Do one of the following:

•  With the Photo CD set up, click the Disc-CD button.

•  Choose File > Open File. For Files of Type, select Kodak Photo CD.

2  Select a file on the Photo CD disk with the extension .pcd, and then click Open.

3  Select a size from the list, and then click OK.


Opening a photo from a diskette
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from a diskette

You can use the Open File button or command to open photos you have already saved on a diskette.

To open a photo from a diskette:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Open File button.

•  Choose File > Open File. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click the Look In menu, and then click your diskette drive.

3  Locate and select the file you want.

If the file you want to open was previously saved in the PhotoDeluxe Business format, you will see a thumbnail preview of the photo after selecting it in the file list.

4  To make the list show only the files saved in a particular format, choose the format from the Files of Type menu.

5  When you've selected the photo you want, click Open.

See also:

Opening a photo from a photo-finishing service diskette


Opening a photo from a video source
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from a video source

You can capture still frames from a video source, such as a video camera or VCR, and open them in PhotoDeluxe Business. To capture still video frames, you need to have video capture hardware that is TWAIN- compliant or have a plug-in module.

To set up a video source or to select a different video source:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the arrow below the Other button.

2  Select your video source from the list (or the closest match) and click OK. If your video source isn't listed, make sure you have installed the video plug-in module. For more information, see the plug-in documentation.

To capture frames from a video source:

1  With the video source set up, click the Other button.

2  Turn on the video source, such as a video camera or VCR.

3  Use your video capture software program to view and capture a video frame. You can capture a frame from a videotape that you've already recorded, or you can capture a frame from a live video feed.

If you're using the Play Inc. Snappy Video Snapshot program, click the Preview button and then click the Play button on your video camera or VCR to see your video. Or, to see a live feed, just click Preview. When you see the video frame you want to use, click Snap to capture the frame.

 Turn off any video display (such as tape length and position), or the display will show up in your captured frame.

4  Close the video capture software program.

If you're not working in a project, the captured frame appears as an untitled document in its own photo window. If you are working in a project, the captured frame appears in the My Photos organizer in the Acquire tab; double-click the captured frame to add it to the current project.

5  Save the captured frame as a PhotoDeluxe Business photo. For more information, see Saving your work.


Opening clip art
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening clip art

You can use the Clip Art button or command to open sample artwork on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM.

Sample clip art

To open clip art:

1  Make sure the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM is in the CD-ROM drive.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Clip Art button.

•  Choose File > Open Special > Clip Art. For more help, see Using menus.

3  Click a gallery tab to see thumbnails of the photos in that gallery.

To see all the photos within a gallery, scroll down. If there are more gallery tabs than can be displayed, click the arrow at the far right to see more tabs.

4  Double-click the photo you want.

Note: You can also click the thumbnail using the right mouse button and choose Open Photo in PhotoDeluxe.


Opening a photo from a photo-finishing service diskette
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from a photo-finishing service diskette

The format in which photos from a photo-finishing service are stored on a diskette varies depending on the photo finisher. Many use common formats that PhotoDeluxe Business can open directly, so first try opening them using the Open File button in the Get & Fix Photo tab, as if the file were an ordinary photo on disk.

If that doesn't work, see if the photo finisher provided software on the disk for you to use. If such software is present, use it to save the photo to your hard disk in any of the PICT, TIFF, JPEG, or GIF file formats, and then use the Open File button in the Get & Fix Photo tab to open it in PhotoDeluxe Business.

To set up a diskette format:

1  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the arrow below the Disc-CD button.

2  Select the format from the list of file types, and then click OK.

To open a photo on a diskette from a photo-finishing service:

1  With the diskette format set up, click the Disc-CD button.

2  Click the Look In menu, and then click your diskette drive.

3  Select an image, and then click Open.

If your diskette format is not supported by PhotoDeluxe Business, use the software provided by the photo-finishing service to save the photos to your hard disk in the PICT or TIFF format. Then use the Open File button to open the photos in PhotoDeluxe Business. For more help, see Opening a photo from a hard disk.

See also:

Opening a photo from a diskette

Opening a photo from a hard disk


Opening a photo from an Internet photo service
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo from an Internet photo service

You can have your photos developed by a photo-finishing service (such as PhotoNet) and then placed on a secure Web page from which you can download them to your hard disk. You must have an active Internet connection to use this feature.

To set up the Internet photo service:

1  Start your Internet connection software (unless your connection is set up to start automatically when a program tries to connect).

2  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the arrow below the Internet button.

3  Select the Internet photo service from the list, and then click OK. If your service isn't listed, contact your service for a plug-in module or a TWAIN driver.

To download photos from the Internet service onto your hard disk:

1  After you've set up your Internet photo service, click the Internet button. (Note that you must be connected to the Internet.)

2  Follow the instructions on-screen to connect to your service and download the photos to your hard disk.

To open photo from the Internet service:

Open the photo the same way you would open any photo in PhotoDeluxe Business. For more information, see Opening a photo from a hard disk.


Opening a photo received from another computer
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening a photo received from another computer

You can use a photo from another computer. For example, you might receive photos in e-mail or on a diskette, or you might download them from a Web site. In all these cases, you would have transferred the photo to your computer, so get the photo using the Open File button in the Get & Fix Photo tab.

Make sure you look in the correct folder on the correct disk. For example, if you downloaded the photo from a Web site, look in the folder where your Web browser software is set to store downloaded files.

See also:

Opening a photo from a hard disk


Opening logo or other EPS files
Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business
Opening logo or other EPS files

Opening a logo or EPS file is the same as opening any other type of file.

Where is the logo or EPS file stored?

•  On a hard disk

•  On a diskette

•  On a photo-finishing service diskette

•  In e-mail


Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business

Click any of the following topics to learn how to save, close, mail, or print a photo and more:

Saving your work

Closing a photo

Choosing a file format

•  Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

•  Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

•  Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

•  Saving in BMP format

•  Saving in GIF format

•  Saving in EPS format

•  Saving in FlashPix format

•  Saving in JPEG format

•  Saving in PCX format

•  Saving in PICT format

•  Saving in PNG format

•  Saving in Targa format

•  Saving in TIFF format

Saving a color photo as a grayscale file

Manipulating the color table of an index color photo

Using a photo with Microsoft OLE

Mailing photos electronically

Setting up a page for printing

Previewing the print of a page

Printing a photo

Printing a T-shirt transfer

Creating a screen saver

Making a photo into a wallpaper


Closing a photo
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Closing a photo

You can use the Close command or click the close box to close a photo window. To close all photos at once, see Close All.

To close a photo:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Close. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Click the close box on the photo window.

Close box

2  Choose one of the following options:

•  Click Yes to save the photo you are closing.

•  Click No to close the photo without saving it.

•  Click Cancel to return to the open photo window.


Choosing a file format
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Choosing a file format

When you save a photo, what file format should you use? If you simply plan to print the photo or reopen it later in PhotoDeluxe Business or the EasyPhoto Browser, you can use just about any format (for a photo with no layers) or the PhotoDeluxe Business or Photoshop format (to preserve layers). But if you want to use your photo in a different program, other file formats can make this task easier.

How do you want to use your photo?

•  Display it on the World Wide Web

•  Send it through e-mail

•  Use it as your screen saver

•  Display it as a desktop wallpaper

•  Use it in a publishing program like Adobe PageMaker® or Adobe FrameMaker®

•  Open it in Adobe Photoshop

•  Open it in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0

•  Open it in Microsoft® Paint

•  Open it in an older paint program that runs in DOS

•  Open it in a Macintosh application

•  Use it in a word processing program like Microsoft Word

•  Use it in a presentation program like Microsoft Powerpoint

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format

Using a photo with Microsoft OLE


Use the GIF format if you want the picture to have transparent areas. Otherwise, use the JPEG format. For more information, see Preparing a photo for online display and Choosing a file format for online use.

If you are creating a document that you want users to download from the Web and print out, use the Adobe Acrobat format.


Use the GIF format or JPEG format to ensure the smallest file size for faster transmission. To send a photo by e-mail directly without first choosing a file format, see Mailing photos electronically.


Use the BMP format. To make a screen saver directly from PhotoDeluxe Business without saving in the BMP format, see Creating a screen saver.


Use the BMP format. To make a wallpaper directly from PhotoDeluxe Business without saving in the BMP format, see Making a photo into a wallpaper.


Use EPS format or TIFF format.


Use the Photoshop format.

Note: If you are using a template, saving the file in Photoshop format will turn it into a bitmap so that you can no longer edit the text.


Use the Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format.


Use the BMP format.


Use the PCX format.


If you plan to use your photo on a MacOS computer, use the PICT format or the TIFF format.


For best results, use the BMP format. However, you can also use the TIFF format, JPEG, FlashPix format, PCX, or GIF formats.


For best results, use the JPEG format, which compresses photos and reduces file size for fast and efficient downloading over the Internet. JPEG compression also retains excellent image quality, although there is always some loss of information with this kind of compression.


Saving in Adobe Acrobat format
Choosing a file format
Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Portable Document Format (PDF) files retain all the graphics, formatting, and fonts of the original document and can be opened and printed by anyone with a MacOS, Windows, UNIX, or DOS Acrobat viewer, regardless of whether the original application or fonts are on the computer where the file is viewed. In addition, Adobe Acrobat format compresses the data so that the file is much smaller than in other formats. When using this format, text in your photo is converted to bitmap format and is made part of the photo.

The Acrobat Reader (which is used to view PDF files) is available on your PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM and can be downloaded free of charge from the Web from http://www.adobe.com

Note: PhotoDeluxe Business can open Acrobat files created in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 and 2.0, and Adobe PhotoShop. PhotoDeluxe Business cannot open Acrobat files created in PhotoDeluxe Business.

To save in Adobe Acrobat format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Acrobat PDF button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Acrobat PDF File. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Choose File > Print Setup. For Name, choose Acrobat PDFWriter, and click OK. Choose File > Print, select Print To File, and click OK.

3 Type a name for the file, select a location, and click Save.

4  Choose the photo quality, and click OK.

See also:

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in BMP format
Choosing a file format
Saving in BMP format

BMP is the standard Microsoft Windows bitmap format.

To save in BMP format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose BMP.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Click the 2 Done tab.

If you want the photo to appear on your Windows desktop, see Making a photo into a wallpaper.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in GIF format
Choosing a file format
Saving in GIF format

The Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) is commonly used to display graphics in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) documents over the World Wide Web and for transferring photos over the Web and other online services.

Note: You cannot create an animated GIF within PhotoDeluxe Business. You can create multiple GIF files within PhotoDeluxe Business, and then combine them into an animated GIF using another program or plug-in.

To save in GIF format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  If you want to include only part of the photo in your HTML document, select that part of the photo. Place the selection on a new layer and hide the original layer. Be sure to hide any layers you do not want to include in the GIF file. For more help, see Making a selection, Moving and copying a selection, and Working with layers.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the GIF button.

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the Email/Web tab, and then click the Web Page button. Follow the instructions on-screen, clicking through the tabs until you come to the 4 Choose tab. Click the GIF Format button.

•  Choose File > Save As > GIF89a Export. For more help, see Using menus.

4  To specify export options before saving the file, click Advanced. For information on these options, see GIF format advanced options.

5  Click OK, type a filename, select a location for the file, and then click Save.

The suffix .gif is added automatically to the filename.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


GIF format advanced options
GIF format
GIF format advanced options

You can use the advanced GIF89a export options to control what colors are used in your GIF file and to specify transparent areas. This is useful if you want your Web page background to show through transparent areas of your GIF image.

To use GIF format advanced options:

1  Export your photo in the GIF format as explained in Saving in GIF format, but don't click OK in the first dialog box. Instead, click Advanced.

2  GIF files use a limited number of colors (up to 256). To set the number of colors used in your photo, choose one of the following options:

•  Choose Exact from the Palette menu if this option is not dimmed. (This option is available only if the photo currently contains 256 or fewer colors.)

•  Choose Adaptive from the Palette menu for the best results if the Exact option is unavailable. The Adaptive option chooses the colors for your photo based on its existing colors. When multiple photos are displayed simultaneously, a Web browser such as Netscape Navigator™ or Microsoft Internet Explorer™ dynamically adjusts to display the colors in your photo.

•  Choose System from the Palette menu to create a color table using the computer's built-in colors.

3  If you chose the Adaptive palette option, use the Colors box or menu to select the smallest number of colors that will still retain the necessary detail in your photo.

The effect of reducing the number of colors on the file size depends on the photo's dimensions and color content. In small-sized photos, the effect on file size is insignificant.

4  To represent transparent areas of the image using a solid color, do one of the following:

•  To make transparent areas the same color as the Web browser window background, leave the Transparency Index Color box at the default color.

•  To change the color used for displaying transparent areas, click the Transparency Index Color box. Set the Foreground color as explained in Using the Color Picker, and then click OK to close the Color Picker. By default, the transparency index color is gray; in RGB values, that's 202 red, 202 green, and 202 blue.

5  To set which colors will become transparent, click Preview.

6  To make a color transparent, select the Eyedropper tool and click the photo preview image or click a color swatch below.

7  To view the photo, use the following techniques:

•  To move the photo within the preview window, select the Hand tool and drag over the photo.

•  To fit all of the photo in the window, double-click the Hand tool.

•  To increase the magnification, select the Zoom tool and click or drag over the part of the photo that you want to magnify. For 100% magnification in the preview window, double-click the Zoom tool. The Zoom level is listed as 1:1 because each pixel of your monitor is displaying only one pixel of the photo.

•  To reduce the magnification, select the Zoom tool, hold down Alt, and click or drag.

Shortcuts: To activate the Zoom tools or the Hand tool while one of these tools is in use, press Ctrl to get the Zoom In tool; press Alt to get the Zoom Out tool. Press the spacebar to get the Hand tool.

8  Click OK to close the preview window.

9  If you are dissatisfied with the results, hold down Alt, and click Reset to restore the colors in the photo. Repeat steps 2 through 8 as needed.

10  To determine how the photo displays as it is downloaded in the Web browser, choose one of the following options:

•  Keep the Interlaced option selected if you want the photo to be displayed gradually as it is downloaded. (This option displays increasingly higher resolution detail as a photo is downloaded.)

•  Deselect the Interlaced option if you plan to use your photo as a background or texture.

11  Click OK, and then click Save.

The suffix .gif is added automatically to the filename.


Saving in EPS format
Choosing a file format
Saving in EPS format

The Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) language file format is supported by most illustration and page-layout programs. You can select this option when you click File > Save As > Other.

To save in EPS format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose EPS.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Set options in the EPS Format dialog box as explained below. Then click OK.

Saving an EPS preview

You can save a 1-bit (monochrome) or 8-bit (256-color) TIFF preview of an EPS file. Because most applications cannot display an EPS file directly, adding a preview image gives you an idea of how the photo will look when it is printed and enables you to accurately place the photo on the page.

Non-PostScript printers (and other programs) may only display or print the preview file (instead of the EPS file). When you view the file outside of PhotoDeluxe Business, if it prints in black and white or appears in black and white, resave the EPS file with an 8-bit TIFF preview.

Setting an encoding option

The encoding options in the EPS Format dialog box control what type of information is saved in the document: ASCII, binary, or JPEG.

•  The ASCII option creates a very large file. Some applications (such as Macromedia FreeHand™) might not support binary EPS documents. For these applications, you should select the ASCII encoding option. In addition, some commercial print-spooling and network-printing software does not support binary encoding. If you experience printing errors, it may be that your print spooler requires ASCII encoding.

•  The Binary option results in a file that is about half the size of a photo saved with the ASCII encoding option and takes half as long to transfer to the printer. In addition, this option creates the highest quality image.

•  The JPEG options result in a much smaller file, but the image quality is not as high as a binary EPS document. Note that some high-end printers (such as imagesetters) might not accept JPEG encoded EPS files. Before printing, make sure that the printer you are going to use can accept JPEG compressed EPS files.

Note: PhotoDeluxe Business does not support the Include Halftone Screen and Include Transfer Function options.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in JPEG format
Choosing a file format
Saving in JPEG format

The JPEG format is frequently used for transferring photos electronically. An abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group, JPEG compression economizes on the way picture information is stored and identifies and deletes extra information not essential to the display of the photo. Depending on the level of compression, however, this loss of information may not be noticeable. JPEG photos are automatically decompressed when they are opened.

Note: If you've saved a photo in JPEG format and then want to make changes to it, make the changes to the original artwork instead of the JPEG file. When you save the same file as JPEG multiple times, your image may be degraded.

To save in JPEG format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  If you want to include only part of the photo in your HTML document, select that part of the photo. Place the selection on a new layer and hide the original layer. Be sure to hide any layers you do not want to include in the JPEG file. For more help, see Making a selection, Moving and copying a selection, and Working with layers.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the JPEG button.

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the Email/Web tab, and then click the Web Page button. Follow the instructions on-screen, clicking through the tabs until you come to the 4 Choose tab. Click the JPEG Format button.

•  Choose File > Save As > JPEG File. For more help, see Using menus.

4  Type a filename, select a location for the file, and then click Save.

5  Click OK to let PhotoDeluxe Business control the conversion, or click Advanced to adjust the settings yourself.

6  If you clicked Advanced in the previous step, specify an image quality and compression level for the file. To specify image quality, enter a value between 0 and 10 or choose an option for Quality; to specify the amount of compression, drag the slider. A trade-off exists between the image quality and the amount of compression; an image compressed using Maximum quality is less compressed (and thus takes up more disk space) than an image compressed using the Low quality option.

7  Select a format option for the JPEG file, and then click OK.

•  To save the file in the most common JPEG format, select Baseline ("Standard"). Some programs (such as Adobe PageMill™) may not support Progressive JPEG format. For these programs, you should select the Baseline ("Standard") option.

•  To optimize the color quality of the image, select Baseline Optimized.

•  To save the file as a progressive JPEG, select Progressive. This option displays the image gradually as it is downloaded from a Web browser, using a series of scans to show increasingly detailed versions of the entire image until all of the data has finished downloading. However, progressive JPEG images require more RAM for viewing. If you select Progressive, specify the number of progressive scans.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in FlashPix format
Choosing a file format
Saving in FlashPix format

The FlashPix (.FPX) file format, developed by Kodak, is designed to speed the transfer and display of large, high-resolution files in applications that support the FlashPix technology. The FlashPix format supports JPEG compression, grayscale, and RGB color modes.

To save in FlashPix format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  If you want to include only part of the photo, select that part of the photo. Place the selection on a new layer and hide the original layer. Be sure to hide any layers you do not want to include in the FlashPix file. For more help, see Making a selection, Moving and copying a selection, and Working with layers.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the FlashPix button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

4  For Save As, choose FlashPix.

5  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

6  Click Save.

7  In the FlashPix Write Options dialog box, specify a compression level for the file. If you choose Use JPEG Compression, enter a JPEG quality value between 0 and 10 or drag the slider. A trade-off exists between the photo quality and the file size; a quality level of 10 is less compressed (and thus takes up more disk space) than a lower quality level.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in PCX format
Choosing a file format
Saving in PCX format

PCX format, created by ZSoft for its PC Paintbrush software, is commonly used by IBM PC-compatible computers. If colors appear incorrect when you open a PCX file, the file was probably made using older software using a previous version of the PCX format.

To save in PCX format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose PCX.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Click the 2 Done tab.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format
Choosing a file format
Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

PhotoDeluxe Business can save a photo as a file that can be opened in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0. When you save to the 1.0 format, all layers are preserved except the Text layer; text is converted to bitmap format and is made part of the layer immediately below, so you will not be able to edit the text again after it is saved in 1.0 format.

To save in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose "PhotoDeluxe 1.0" or "PhotoDeluxe Business, PhotoDeluxe 2.0".

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Click the 2 Done tab.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in Adobe Photoshop format
Choosing a file format
Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

PhotoDeluxe Business can save files to the format used by Adobe Photoshop. When you save to this format, all layers are preserved except the Text layer. Text is converted to bitmap format and is made part of the layer immediately below, so you will not be able to edit the text again after it is saved in Photoshop format.

To save in Photoshop format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose Photoshop.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Click the 2 Done tab.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in PICT format
Choosing a file format
Saving in PICT format

The PICT format is widely used among MacOS graphics and page-layout applications as an intermediary file format to transfer documents between applications.

To save in PICT format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose PICT File.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Click the 2 Done tab.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in PNG format
Choosing a file format
Saving in PNG format

The PNG format was developed as an alternative to the GIF format and, like GIF, is used for displaying images on the World Wide Web and other online services. PNG preserves all color information and alpha channels in an image and uses a lossless compression scheme to reduce file size.

When saving an image in PNG format, you can choose to display the image in gradually increasing detail as it is downloaded. To do this, select Adam7 for Interlace. You can also select a filtering algorithm, which is used to prepare the image data for compression.

To save in PNG format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose PNG.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  For Interlace, choose None if you want the image to display all at once. Choose Adam7 if you want to display the image in gradually increasing detail as it is downloaded.

7  For Filter, choose an image data compression option or None, and then click OK.

8  Click the 2 Done tab.

After you've created the PNG file, open it to see if it looks the way you want. If it doesn't, go back to the original photo, resave it as a PNG file, and then try one of the other Filter options.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in Targa format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in Targa format
Choosing a file format
Saving in Targa format

The TGA (Targa) format is designed for use on systems that use the Truevision video board. It is commonly supported by MS-DOS color applications.

To save in Targa format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose Targa.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  Choose how many bits/pixels you want in your photo: 16 bits/pixel, 24 bits/pixel, or 32 bits/pixel, and then click OK.

7  Click the 2 Done tab.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in TIFF format


Saving in TIFF format
Choosing a file format
Saving in TIFF format

The TIFF format is used in desktop publishing and for exchanging pictures between computer platforms (such as Windows and MacOS). When you save a PhotoDeluxe Business file in TIFF format, you can choose a format that can be read by either Windows or MacOS systems.

To save in TIFF format:

1  Open the photo you want.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Other Formats button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Other. For more help, see Using menus.

3  For Save As, choose TIFF.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  Click Save.

6  In the TIFF Options dialog box, specify what computer will be used to view the image: IBM® PC or Macintosh.

7  To compress the document to a smaller size automatically, select the LZW Compression check box. Unlike JPEG compression, LZW compression does not affect quality. Then click OK. For more help, see JPEG format.

See also:

Saving in Adobe Acrobat format

Saving in Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 1.0 or 2.0 format

Saving in Adobe Photoshop format

Saving in BMP format

Saving in GIF format

Saving in EPS format

Saving in FlashPix format

Saving in JPEG format

Saving in PCX format

Saving in PICT format

Saving in PNG format

Saving in Targa format


Manipulating the color table of an index color photo
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Manipulating the color table of an index color photo

At times, you might want to convert a photo to an indexed-color image to edit an image’s color table or to export an image to an application that supports only 8-bit color. This is useful, for example, for multimedia animation applications and Web pages. When you convert a photo to indexed color, all but 256 colors are deleted from the image.

If you use two index color photos in the same application and discover some unexpected color changes, you may want to change one or more colors in the table. By editing the color table, you can correct this problem, for example, making the blues in one photo match the blues in another by locating the blues at the same position in both tables. Editing the color table can also help you achieve some interesting special effects.

To edit colors in the color table:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Index Color button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Index Color File. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click Advanced, click Custom under Palette, and then click OK.

3  To use one of the PhotoDeluxe Business predefined color tables, make a selection from the Table menu:

•  The Custom option is used whenever you make changes to the built-in color tables.

•  The Black Body option displays a transition of colors based on the different colors a black-body radiator emits as it is heated: from black to red, orange, yellow, and white.

•  The Grayscale option displays a smooth transition from black to white in 256 levels of gray.

•  The Spectrum option displays a smooth transition between the colors that result when white light passes through a prism: violet, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red.

•  The System option displays the standard 256-color palette.

•  The Window System option displays the standard Windows 256-color system palette.

4  If you don't want one of the predefined tables, or if you want to modify one of them, click or drag in the table to choose the color or range of colors you want to change.

5  In the Color Picker dialog box, select a color and click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

6  If you chose a range of colors, select another color in the Color Picker to set the last color in the range, and then click OK.

PhotoDeluxe Business sets the first and last color tile in the range to the first and last color you chose, then it sets the remaining tiles to colors in between those two colors. The colors you selected in the Color Picker are placed in the range you selected in the Color Table dialog box.

7  Click OK in the Color Table dialog box.

For further instructions on saving an index color photo, see Index Color File.

8  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

9  Click Save.


Using a photo with Microsoft OLE
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Using a photo with Microsoft OLE

Object linking and embedding are two ways to use an PhotoDeluxe Business photo in another application and update that photo when it is modified. PhotoDeluxe Business is an OLE 2.0 server, which means it supports embedding or linking an image in an OLE container application (usually a word-processor or page-layout program). For example, you can insert PhotoDeluxe Business files and selections into other OLE applications such as Adobe PageMaker 6.5 and Microsoft Word 7.0 using copy and paste or other methods.

Once an image is in the container application, you can double-click it to open and edit it in PhotoDeluxe Business. When you close the file in PhotoDeluxe Business, the image is updated in the container application.

To link or embed a selection or image in an OLE application:

Do one of the following:

•  Drag a thumbnail from a photo organizer window and drop it in your OLE container application to embed the photo in your document. For related information, see About the photo organizer.

•  Copy a selection in PhotoDeluxe Business and insert it in your OLE container application using its Paste Special command. Refer to your word-processing or page-layout application documentation for more instructions. Pasted selections can only be embedded, not linked.

•  Use your OLE container application's Insert Object command to insert a new PhotoDeluxe Business photo or existing PhotoDeluxe Business file as an OLE-embedded or OLE-linked object. Refer to your word-processing or page-layout application documentation for instructions.

To insert an unlinked screen-resolution bitmap into an OLE application:

With any selection tool, use the left mouse button to drag a selection to the OLE container application. When you drop the object, it appears as a screen-resolution bitmap (72 dots per inch), which cannot be automatically updated in PhotoDeluxe Business.

To modify and update a linked or embedded image in an OLE application:

1  Double-click the linked or embedded image in your word-processor or page-layout application to launch PhotoDeluxe Business (if it is not already running) and open the image for editing.

2  Modify the image as desired.

3  Do one of the following:

•  For embedded images, close the file, or choose File > Exit & Return to <application name>. For more help, see Using menus.

•  For linked images, save and close the file.

Note: You can also modify linked files without first opening the container document; the linked image will be updated the next time you open the document in its OLE container application.


Mailing photos electronically
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Mailing photos electronically

If you have a Windows Messaging e-mail program running on your system, you can use the Mail command to transfer your photo through e-mail. If you have questions about your e-mail program, contact your e-mail administrator or the company that makes your e-mail program.

To mail your photos electronically:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the Email/Web tab, click the Email button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Choose File > Send To > Mail. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Attach the photo manually using your e-mail software.

PhotoDeluxe sends the photo in PhotoDeluxe Business format, so the recipient needs PhotoDeluxe Business or PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 2.0 to open it.


Setting up a page for printing
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Setting up a page for printing

Use Page Setup to set options for printing your photo. The Page Setup dialog box lets you designate a printer, a paper size, and whether to print the picture in a tall or wide format.

To specify page options for printing:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Page Setup. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, and then click the Page Setup button.

2  For Name, select your specific printer, or select the default printer.

3  For Size and Source, select the paper and paper input method.

4  For Orientation, select one of the following options:

•  Choose Portrait for a vertical orientation.

•  Choose Landscape for a horizontal orientation.

5  Choose any other printing options as needed.

6  Click OK.

See also:

Previewing the print of a page

Printing a photo

Print Multiple


Previewing the print of a page
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Previewing the print of a page

Before you print your photo or change the size of a photo, you may want to preview how the image will appear on the printed page.

To preview a page:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, and then click the Print Preview button.

•  Choose File > Print Preview. For more help, see Using menus.

After the photo appears on the preview of the printed page, see if the entire photo fits within the printer's printable area. If it doesn't you may want to use Page Setup to change the page size or orientation, or use PhotoDeluxe Business to resize or rotate the photo so it fits. For more information, see Setting up a page for printing, Changing the size of a photo, and Rotating a photo.

The dimensions of the page shown in the page preview box correspond to the page size selected in the Page Setup dialog box.

2  When you're finished viewing the preview, click OK.

See also:

Printing a photo

Print Multiple


Printing a photo
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Printing a photo

Use the Print button to print your photos or completed projects. PhotoDeluxe Business prints in the exact center of the page. To set printing options, use the Page Setup button. To see how your photo will appear on the printed page, use the Print Preview button.

Note: If the exact placement of the photo on the page is important, save the photo as a TIFF, and print the photo from a page layout program, such as Adobe PageMaker. For more information, see Saving in TIFF format.

To print a photo:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, and then click the Print button.

•  Choose File > Print. For more help, see Using menus.

2  For Copies, type the number of copies you want.

3  For PhotoDeluxe Output Quality, select whether to print the Best possible resolution (slowest but highest quality) or Draft (fastest but lowest quality) or something in between.

Note: Depending on your printer, one or more of these choices may not be available for photos that have a resolution of 300 or 360 pixels per inch or higher. To make such a photo print faster, use the Photo Size command to reduce the resolution. For example, for many inkjet or laser printers, 200 pixels per inch (ppi) looks fine. For more information, see Getting the best size for printing.

4  When you have the settings you want, click OK.

To print multiple copies of your photo on a single page, such as for a business card:

Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, click the Multiple On A Page button, and then follow the instructions on-screen. For more information, see Print Multiple and Avery paper that works with Guided Activity projects.

To print a selected area of the photo:

1  Select the desired area using the Rectangle tool or the Square tool. For more help, see Selecting basic shapes.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, and then click the Print button.

•  Choose File > Print.

3  For Print Range, select Selection. Then click OK.

See also:

Setting up a page for printing

Previewing the print of a page


Printing a T-shirt transfer
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Printing a T-shirt transfer

You can print your photo to transfer material that you iron on a T-shirt. Before you print a T-shirt transfer, make sure the photo looks the way you want. You may want to print a test page to see if the photo prints the way you want.

To print a T-shirt transfer:

1  Put your T-shirt transfer paper in your printer.

2  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, and then click the Print T-Shirt button.

3  Follow the instructions on-screen. PhotoDeluxe Business will print a mirrored image onto transfer material so that it will appear correctly when ironed onto a T-shirt.

4  Iron the T-shirt transfer on to your T-shirt.

See also:

Setting up a page for printing

Previewing the print of a page

Printing a photo

Print Multiple


Creating a screen saver
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Creating a screen saver

You can make a screen-saver slide show out of any photos. When the screen saver is activated, it displays all the photos you've added, cycling through them as a slide show. Photos you add to the screen-saver slide show appear as thumbnail images in the Screen Saver gallery in the My Photos window. For more information about using galleries, see Organizing your photos.

To add a photo to a screen-saver slide show:

1  Open the photo and do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Screen Saver button, and follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Choose File > Send To > Screen Saver. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click the Windows Start button, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Display icon.

3  In the dialog box, click the Screen Saver tab.

4  Choose EasyPhoto Slide Show from the Screen Saver menu, and then click OK.

To remove a photo from the screen-saver slide show:

Remove the photo from the Screen Saver gallery. For more information, see Deleting a photo from a gallery.


Making a photo into a wallpaper
Getting a photo out of PhotoDeluxe Business
Making a photo into a wallpaper

You can make any photo into a "wallpaper"—that is, make it appear in the background of your Windows desktop.

Centered	Tiled

To make a photo appear on the desktop:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Screen Wallpaper tab, and follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Choose File > Send To > Wallpaper. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click the Windows Start button, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Display icon.

3  Click the Background tab, and then choose PhotoDeluxe from the Wallpaper list.

4  Select the Display option you want, either Tile (repeated side-by-side) or Center, and then click OK.


Organizing your photos

Click any of the following topics to learn how to organize your photos:

About the photo organizer

Comparing organizer windows

Adding a photo to a gallery by dragging

Adding a photo to a gallery from a photo window

Adding a photo to a gallery from an external source

Adding a photo to a gallery while saving

Rearranging photos in a gallery

Adding a title to a photo

Adding a caption to a photo

Getting information on a photo

Creating a new gallery

Deleting a gallery

Deleting a photo from a gallery


About the photo organizer
Organizing your photos
About the photo organizer

PhotoDeluxe Business includes a photo organizer that displays photos in floating windows according to different categories, such as clip art, samples, templates, or your own photos. The photo organizer groups photos into a gallery, identified by a tab with the gallery name on it. For related information, see Comparing organizer windows.

The photos (or other bitmap images) in each gallery appear as thumbnails, which represent files stored outside the gallery. Each thumbnail also includes descriptive details about the actual file it represents. For more details, see Getting information on a photo.


Comparing organizer windows
Organizing your photos
Comparing organizer windows

PhotoDeluxe Business includes several photo organizer windows for storing photos and template files. The Samples, Clip Art, and Templates photo organizer windows display thumbnails representing project material stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM. A fourth window, My Photos, shows thumbnails for your own photos and projects.

Each photo organizer window lets you view and retrieve photos from a gallery. Only the My Photos window lets you add, delete, and arrange photos.

To display the My Photos organizer:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

To hide the My Photos organizer:

Choose File > My Photos > Hide My Photos.

To display the Sample Photos organizer:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Open Special > Get Sample Photo.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Sample Photos button.

Note: Make sure that the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM is in the CD-ROM drive.

To display the Clip Art organizer:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Open Special > Clip Art.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the Clip Art button.

Note: Make sure that the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM is in the CD-ROM drive.

To display the Template organizer:

Click the Projects button, click a tab, and then click a project. Follow the instructions on-screen.

Note: Make sure that the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM is in the CD-ROM drive.

See also:

Holding a photo


Adding a photo to a gallery
Organizing your photos
Adding a photo to a gallery

Click any of the following topics to learn how to add a photo to a gallery:

Adding a photo to a gallery by dragging

Adding a photo to a gallery from a photo window

Adding a photo to a gallery from an external source

Adding a photo to a gallery while saving


Adding a photo to a gallery by dragging
Adding a photo to a gallery
Adding a photo to a gallery by dragging

In the My Photos window, you can drag photos to a gallery. A photo you add appears in the gallery window as a thumbnail of the actual file. You can also drag a template you create or edit.

To drag a photo to a gallery:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  In the My Photos window, click the tab of the gallery where you want to add the photo. For related information, see Creating a new gallery.

If there are more gallery tabs than can be displayed, click the arrow at the far right to see more tabs.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Drag a photo from the Hold Photo area of the PhotoDeluxe Business window to the gallery. For related information, see Holding a photo.

•  Open a photo in the photo window, as explained in Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business. Make sure the Object selection tool is selected as explained in Choosing a selection tool. Then drag the photo from the photo window to the gallery.

•  Drag a photo from Explorer to the gallery.

4  When a heavy vertical line appears at the location you want, release the mouse button.


Adding a photo to a gallery from a photo window
Adding a photo to a gallery
Adding a photo to a gallery from a photo window

In the My Photos organizer window, you can add photos to an existing gallery or create a new gallery. A photo you add appears in the gallery as a thumbnail of the actual file.

To add a photo to a gallery from a photo window:

1  Open a photo in PhotoDeluxe Business. For more help, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

2  Choose File > My Photos > Add Photo to Gallery.

3  Do one of the following:

•  If you hadn't saved the photo yet, the Save As dialog box appears. For File Name, type a name. For Add to Gallery, choose the gallery you want. For Title, type a name. Then, click Save.

•  If you have already saved the photo, the Add Photo To Gallery dialog box appears. For Gallery, choose the gallery you want. For Title, type a name. Click Add to Gallery, and then click Done.

 You can also drag a photo from the photo window to a gallery. For details, see Adding a photo to a gallery by dragging.

See also:

Creating a new gallery

Adding a title to a photo


Adding a photo to a gallery from an external source
Adding a photo to a gallery
Adding a photo to a gallery from an external source

In the My Photos window, you can add photos directly from external sources, such as digital or video cameras, scanners, discs, CD-ROMs, and the Internet. Photos appear as thumbnails of the actual files.

Galleries basically maintain "shortcuts" to the locations of the actual photos; they don't actually store the images. When you select a thumbnail in the gallery, you'll need to insert the CD-ROM or diskette that contains the actual image file.

See also:

Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.


Adding a photo to a gallery while saving
Adding a photo to a gallery
Adding a photo to a gallery while saving

You can easily add a photo to a gallery at the same time you save the photo to your hard disk.

To save a photo to a gallery:

1  Open a photo in PhotoDeluxe Business. For more help, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

2  Choose File > Save or choose File > Save As > PhotoDeluxe. For more help, see Using menus.

3  In the Save or Save As dialog box, type a name for File Name. For more information on saving a photo, see Saving your work.

4  Make sure Add to Gallery is checked, and then choose a destination gallery from the menu next to the check box. If you want to create a new gallery, click the New Gallery button. For more help, see Creating a new gallery.

5  Type a different name in the Title box, if you want. For details, see Adding a title to a photo.

6  Click Save. A thumbnail of the photo appears in the gallery.

See also:

Deleting a gallery

Deleting a photo from a gallery


Rearranging photos in a gallery
Organizing your photos
Rearranging photos in a gallery

Once you add photos to a gallery, you can rearrange them within the same gallery or move them to a different gallery.

To move a photo within the same gallery:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  In the My Photos window, click the tab of the gallery with the photo you want to move.

3  Drag the photo until a heavy vertical line appears at the new location, and then release the mouse button.

To move a photo to a different gallery:

1  Close any open photos or minimize their windows.

2  In the My Photos window, click the tab of the gallery with the photo you want to move.

3  Drag the photo from the gallery to the photo window in PhotoDeluxe Business.

4  In the My Photos window, click the tab of the gallery where you want to move the photo.

5  Do one of the following:

•  Drag the photo from the photo window to the gallery until a heavy vertical line appears at the new location, and then release the mouse button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Add Photo to Gallery. For details, see Adding a photo to a gallery from a photo window.


Adding a title to a photo
Organizing your photos
Adding a title to a photo

When you add a photo to a gallery, PhotoDeluxe Business uses the photo's filename as a title, which you can change. The title appears at the bottom of the thumbnail image and as part of the photo information available for each photo in a gallery. For details on photo information, see Getting information on a photo.

To add a title to a photo:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Select the photo, and choose File > My Photos > Show Photo Info. (You can also click the photo using the right mouse button, and then choose Edit Photo Information.)

3  Click in the Title text box and type a title, up to 32 characters in length. Note that the title bar has room for only about 12 characters. Although titles longer than 12 characters appear clipped, you can see the entire title in the Edit Photo Information dialog box.

 To change the titles of other photos, click Next or Previous to cycle through the photos in the gallery. Then edit the text in the Title box.

4  Click Close.


Adding a caption to a photo
Organizing your photos
Adding a caption to a photo

You can add a caption, or note, about a photo. The caption appears as part of the photo information available for each photo in a gallery. For details on photo information, see Getting information on a photo.

To add a caption to a photo:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Select the photo, and choose File > My Photos > Show Photo Info. (You can also click the photo using the right mouse button, and then choose Edit Photo Information.)

3  Click in the Caption text box and type a caption, up to 256 characters in length. To start a new paragraph, press Enter.

 To quickly add more captions, click Next or Previous to cycle through other photos in the gallery, and then type text in the Caption text box.

4  Click Close.


Getting information on a photo
Organizing your photos
Getting information on a photo

You can get certain information about a stored photo, including its title, caption, filename, storage location, and the storage type (hard disk, CD, and so on).

To get information on a photo:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click the title of a photo below its thumbnail.

To edit photo information:

1  In the My Photos window, select the photo, and choose File > My Photos > Show Photo Info. (You can also click the photo using the right mouse button, and then choose Edit Photo Information.)

With the Edit Photo Information dialog box open, you can change the title or caption of the photo. For details, see Adding a title to a photo or Adding a caption to a photo. However, you cannot change the filename, or location of the file.

2  Click Close.


Creating a new gallery
Organizing your photos
Creating a new gallery

You can create a gallery to view and organize your photos so you can quickly access them or paste copies of them into other documents. You can also create an empty gallery and fill it with photos later. Galleries appear in an organizer window as tabbed dividers.

To create a new gallery:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Choose File > My Photos > Create New Gallery.

3  In the Create Gallery dialog box, type the gallery name in the text box, and then click Create Gallery.

The new gallery appears in the Galleries list and as a tab in the My Photos window. If there are more gallery tabs than can be displayed, click the arrow at the far right to see more tabs.

Note: Gallery names are case-sensitive, so you can create one gallery called Vacation and another called vacation.

4  Add additional galleries, if desired, and then click Done to close the Create Gallery dialog box. You can add as many galleries as the amount of disk space on your hard disk allows.


Deleting a gallery
Organizing your photos
Deleting a gallery

When you delete a gallery, what gets deleted depends on which gallery you're deleting and where the photos are stored:

•  If you are deleting the Acquire gallery, deleting a gallery deletes the gallery's tab, the gallery's thumbnail images, and the original photo files on the hard disk.

•  If the photos in the gallery are stored on the hard disk in the EZPhoto\Photo folder (inside the PhotoDeluxe Business program folder) and the photos are not in another gallery, deleting a gallery deletes the gallery's tab, the gallery's thumbnail images, and the original photo files on the hard disk.

•  In all other cases, deleting a gallery deletes the gallery's tab and the gallery's thumbnail images.

To delete a gallery:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Choose File > My Photos > Delete Gallery.

3  Select the gallery you want to delete from the list, and click Delete Gallery.

4  Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5  Delete additional galleries, if desired, and then click Done to close the Delete Gallery dialog box.


Deleting a photo from a gallery
Organizing your photos
Deleting a photo from a gallery

When you delete a photo from a gallery, what gets deleted depends on which gallery the photo is in or where the photo is stored:

•  If the photo is in the Acquire gallery, deleting a photo deletes the thumbnail, its link to the original photo file, and the original photo file on the hard disk.

•  If the photo file is stored on the hard disk in the EZPhoto\Photo folder (inside the PhotoDeluxe Business program folder), deleting a photo deletes the thumbnail, its link to the original photo file, and the original photo file on the hard disk.

•  If the photo is stored anywhere else, deleting a photo from a gallery deletes the thumbnail and its link to the original photo. If you want to delete the original photo file on the hard disk, use Windows Explorer or My Computer.

To delete a photo from a gallery:

1  Do one of the following to open the My Photos window:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Get Photo tab, and then click the My Photos button.

•  Choose File > My Photos > Show My Photos. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click the gallery's tab to open the gallery.

3  Select the photo you want to delete, or hold down Shift while you select multiple photos.

4  Choose File > My Photos > Delete Photo from Gallery.

 You can also click the thumbnail using the right mouse button and choose Delete Photo from Gallery.

See also:

Adding a photo to a gallery while saving


Making a selection

Click any of the following topics to learn about selections and how to make them.

About selections

Choosing a selection tool

Selecting basic shapes

Using the SmartSelect tool

Selecting by color

Selecting an irregular shape

Adding to or removing sections from a selection

Selecting the unselected areas of a photo

Selecting and deselecting an entire photo

Moving the selection border

Looking at the Selections palette


About selections
Making a selection
About selections

Most of the PhotoDeluxe Business editing tools and special effects change the entire photo. To change only an area of a photo, you must select that area before you use the tool. For example, if you want to copy part of a photo and paste it onto a different background, you have to select the part of the photo you want before you copy it.

When working with digital photos, making a selection means drawing a special outline (called a selection border) around the part of the photo you want to change. Once an area is selected, special effects and painting and editing tools will affect only that area. Unselected areas will not be affected.

If you are using a photo that has more than one layer, be aware that the selection affects only the active layer. For more information, see Editing a layered picture.


Choosing a selection tool
Making a selection
Choosing a selection tool

Various selection tools are available to help you make a selection that is the correct shape and size for the area you want to select. You can choose a selection tool from the Select menu or the Selections palette.

To open the Selections palette:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab and then click the View Selections button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Show Selections. For more help, see Using menus and Using long menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

To choose a selection tool:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose the tool you want to use from the menu at the top of the Selections palette, and click the New button to start a new selection. Note that the buttons (New, Add, Reduce, Move) are not available when the Object selection tool is displayed.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Select > Selection Tools, and then choose the tool you want to use. For more help, see Using menus and Using long menus.

For more details about the Selections palette, see Looking at the Selections palette.

See also:

Adding to or removing sections from a selection


Selecting basic shapes
Making a selection
Selecting basic shapes

To select regularly shaped areas, use the Square, Rectangle, Oval, and Circle tools.

To select a regularly shaped area:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Choose the Square, Rectangle, Oval, or Circle tool from the menu at the top of the Selections palette.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Select > Selection Tools and choose Square, Rectangle, Oval, or Circle. For more help, see Using menus and Using long menus.

3  Drag across the part of the photo you want to select. When the area you want to select is enclosed in the selection border (dotted lines), release the mouse button.

  By default, these tools draw the selection border from its edge. However, it can be easier to select circular shapes from their center. To draw the selection border from its center, hold down Alt while you drag.

Drag from corner	Drag from center

In this example, we used the Selection Fill button to delete the area outside the selection border and fill it with color. For more information, see Filling a selection.

See also:

Adding to or removing sections from a selection


Using the SmartSelect tool
Making a selection
Using the SmartSelect tool

SmartSelect makes it easier to select irregularly shaped objects by using color differences to snap the selection outline to the desired edge.

To use the SmartSelect tool:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Choose the SmartSelect tool from the menu at the top of the Selections palette.

•  With the long menus displayed, choose Select > Selection Tools > SmartSelect. For more help, see Using menus and Using long menus.

3  If the SmartSelect Options palette is available, set options. For details, see SmartSelect Options palette settings.

4  Click a starting point, and then move the cursor along the edge (without holding down the mouse button). As SmartSelect detects an edge, it lays down points. If you don't like where the selection line falls, back up the mouse to the last point. If you want to remove the last point, press Delete as you move the cursor over the point.

5  To lay down a point manually, click the left mouse button once. To cancel the entire selection and begin again, press Esc.

6  To complete the selection, position the pointer over the point where you began dragging. When the pointer changes to an OK symbol, click the left mouse button once.

 To have SmartSelect automatically complete the selection regardless of the pointer's location, double-click the mouse button, or hold down Ctrl and click the left mouse button once.

See also:

Adding to or removing sections from a selection


SmartSelect Options palette settings
Making a selection
SmartSelect Options palette settings

If you're using the menus or the Advanced button, then you have access to the SmartSelect Options palette where you can alter these options. If you're working in a guided activity, you will not see these options.

•  Feather—set from 0 to 250 pixels to fade the edges of a selection, creating a gradual transition from the selection to the surrounding area. This smoothing can cause some loss of detail at the edge of the selection. For more advanced feathering, see Feathering a selection.

•  Sensitivity—set from 1 to 100 to adjust how sensitive SmartSelect is to color differences. Higher values make the tool more sensitive.

•  Brush Width—set from 1 to 20 to adjust how close you must be to the desired edge. Higher values make SmartSelect search a larger area for color differences.

See also:

Using the SmartSelect tool


Selecting by color
Making a selection
Selecting by color

To select an area based on a range of pixel colors, use the Color Wand tool. For information on how you adjust the range of colors that the Color Wand selects, see Cursors.

To select an area that is all one color:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Choose the Color Wand tool from the menu at the top of the Selections palette.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Select > Selection Tools > Color Wand. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Click in the area you want to select in the photo. PhotoDeluxe Business selects an adjacent area that is within the range of colors as the spot you clicked. If you want to add colors to the selection, click the Add button in the Selections palette, and then click another area in the photo.

In this example, the desired background image was copied. The current photo background was selected and then, using the Paste Into button, replaced with the desired background. For more help, see Pasting into another selection.

See also:

Adding to or removing sections from a selection


Selecting an irregular shape
Making a selection
Selecting an irregular shape

To select irregularly shaped areas, use the Polygon, Trace, or SmartSelect tool. All of these tools let you select part of a photo by tracing around it with the pointer. The Trace tool lets you draw a freeform shape to make a selection. The Polygon tool also lets you make irregular shapes by dragging but adds the ability to make straight-edged selections by clicking. For help on using the SmartSelect tool, see Using the SmartSelect tool.

To select an irregularly shaped area with the Trace tool:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Choose the Trace tool from the menu at the top of the Selections palette.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Select > Selection Tools > Trace. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Click and drag to trace around the area you want to select until you return to the starting point.

4  To complete the selection, release the mouse button.

To select an irregularly shaped area with the Polygon tool:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Choose the Polygon tool from the menu at the top of the Selections palette.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Select > Selection Tools > Polygon.

3  Drag to trace around the area you want to select.

4  To select a straight-edged area, click at each end of the straight edge until you return to the starting point.

5  Double-click to complete the selection.

See also:

Adding to or removing sections from a selection


Adding to or removing sections from a selection
Making a selection
Adding to or removing sections from a selection

You can add to or remove a section from a selected area using any of the selection tools.

In the following example, we accidentally completed the selection without selecting the entire flower. We then added the unselected portions.

To add to a selection:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Choose the desired tool from the Selections palette.

3  Click the Add button ( [image]).

4  Drag or click to trace around the area you want to add.

You can also use the Add button to select more than one area. In this example, we used the Color Wand and the Add button to select the stem.

You can also reduce the size of a selected area using any of the selection tools.

In the following example, we removed the extraneous area on the left side of the flower photo from the selection.

To remove a section from a selection:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Choose the desired tool from the Selections palette.

3  Click the Reduce button ( [image]).

4  Drag or click to trace around the area you want to remove from the selection.

See Selecting the unselected areas of a photo for related information.


Selecting the unselected areas of a photo
Making a selection
Selecting the unselected areas of a photo

Sometimes it is more convenient to select the area you don't want to modify, and then invert the selection.

Note: If you want to change the background of a photo, you can get step-by-step instructions by clicking the Special Effects button, clicking the Collage tab, and then clicking the Change Background button.

To invert a selection:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Use any selection tool to select the area you don't want to modify. For more help, see Making a selection.

3  Do one of the following:

•  In the Selections palette, click the Invert button.

•  With the long menus displayed, choose Select > Invert. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

•  Press Ctrl+I.

  Choose the Invert command or click the Invert button again if you want to return to the original selection.


Selecting and deselecting an entire photo
Making a selection
Selecting and deselecting an entire photo

You use the Selections palette to select and deselect an entire photo.

To select an entire photo:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  In the Selections palette, click the All button. For help on displaying the Selections palette, see Making a selection.

•  With the long menus displayed, choose Select > All. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

•  Press Ctrl+A.

To deselect all selected areas in a photo:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Do one of the following:

•  In the Selections palette, click the None button.

•  With the long menus displayed, choose Select > None.

•  Press Ctrl+D.


Moving the selection border
Making a selection
Moving the selection border

If you make a selection that is the correct shape and size for the area you want to select, but it isn't in the correct location, you can move the selection border until it covers the area you want.

To move the selection border:

1  If the Selections palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

2  Make sure a selection tool other than the Object selection tool is active.

3  The New button [image] or Move button [image] should be depressed in the Selections palette, and the appropriate selection pointer should appear when you move the pointer over your photo. If it isn't, or if you're not sure, click the New button again. For help on displaying the Selections palette, see Choosing a selection tool.

4  Position the pointer inside the selected area.

5  Hold down Ctrl and Alt and press the arrow keys on the keyboard.


Working with layers

Click any of the following topics to learn about layers:

About layers

Creating a layered picture

Turning a floating selection into a layer

Editing a layered picture

Monitoring layer file size

Duplicating a layer

Copying a layer between photos

Moving a layer

Rearranging the order of layers

Viewing a layer

Deleting a layer

Merging layers

Blending layers

Selecting a blending mode


About layers
Working with layers
About layers

PhotoDeluxe Business lets you create pictures with multiple layers. Each layer is like a transparent sheet of plastic on which you can place a photo, add text, or paint. The layers are stacked one on top of the other, and where there are no images on a layer, you can see through to the layer below. Layers let you experiment freely with different combinations of photos, text, and graphics without affecting the photo underneath. You can add, delete, and rearrange the stacking order of layers.

Image layers	Merged image

When you add text to a photo, it creates a special layer at the top of the layer stack (in front of all other layers). This layer is always at the top of your layer stack. Unlike other layers, you cannot select, delete, or change the stacking order of the Text layer. For more help, see Adding text to a photo.

Your most important tool in working with layers is the Layers palette, which shows you how many layers your picture has, what is on each layer, and provides other tools for working with layers.

Note: You cannot directly manipulate layers while working in a guided activity.

See also:

Looking at the Layers palette

Creating a layered picture

Editing a layered picture

Monitoring layer file size


Creating a layered picture
Working with layers
Creating a layered picture

PhotoDeluxe Business lets you create up to 99 layers in a document. You can create a new layer by dragging a photo from the Hold Photo area or a photo organizer window, by dragging a layer from another photo, by pasting a copied selection, or by using the Layers palette to create a blank layer. Some features, such as the Text tool or the Drop Shadow button, automatically create new layers. For help on adding layers from other photos, see Copying a layer between photos.

Once you create a new layer, it appears in the Layers palette with a name and thumbnail representation.

Note: The more layers you add, the larger your file becomes and the more memory is required to process your picture. For more information, see Monitoring layer file size, Deleting a layer, and Disk full errors or unusually slow operations.

To create a new blank layer:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  Do one of the following in the Layers palette:

•  Click the New Layer icon.

•  Choose New Layer from the Layers palette menu.

3  Type a name for the layer, type a percentage for Opacity, and choose a blending mode. For more help, see Blending layers. Then click OK.

 To create a new layer without seeing the New Layer dialog box, hold down Alt as you click the New Layer icon. The new layer is created with default Blend and Opacity options.

To select a layer:

Click the name of the layer in the Layers palette.

To rename a layer:

Double-click the layer name in the Layers palette, type a new name, and then click OK.


Turning a floating selection into a layer

When you move a selection, the selection becomes a temporary layer known as a floating selection. You can see this temporary layer represented in the Layers palette. When you deselect the selection, the temporary layer is merged into the layer beneath it. If you don't want to merge the selection with the layer below, you can turn the floating selection into a layer by itself. Turning a selection into a layer gives you the freedom to move or remove the selection later without changing the underlying picture.

For more help on layers, see About layers.

To convert a floating selection to a layer:

1  Display the Layers palette as explained in Looking at the Layers palette.

2  Make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

3  Drag the selection, which creates a floating selection.

4  Choose Make Layer from the Layers palette menu.

5  Set layer options as explained in Blending Layers. Then click OK.


Editing a layered picture
Working with layers
Editing a layered picture

Once you've added a new layer to a document, you can still edit its contents. You can change the image on the layer using the painting or editing tools or by applying any special effect. You can also move, rearrange, and blend layers. Editing affects only the active layer. The active layer is highlighted in the Layers palette.

You cannot directly manipulate layers while working in a guided activity. When you open a Guided Activity template, you can edit the text and photos, but you cannot edit the artwork. To edit the artwork, you must merge all layers in the template, and then use the selection tools to select and edit the artwork. Note that merging the layers reduces the quality of the template. For more information, see Merging Layers and Making a selection.

Note: If you create a project using a guided activity, and save the file without completing it, you may not be able to complete the project within the activity.

Some activities create multilayered photos. When you open a layered photo within an activity, PhotoDeluxe Business automatically creates a copy of the file with the layers merged. (The copy is called "Untitled", and the original file remains unchanged in the Hold Photo area.) Once layers have been merged, they cannot be edited independently. You must either use the merged copy in the activity or edit the original file using other PhotoDeluxe Business tools and features.

To make a layer active using the Layers palette:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  Click the layer's name in the Layers palette.

To make a layer active using the Object selection tool:

1  Select the Object selection tool as explained in Choosing a selection tool.

2  Click an object in the photo that is on the layer you want to edit.

See also:

Moving a layer

Rearranging the order of layers

Viewing a layer

Blending layers


Monitoring layer file size
Working with layers
Monitoring layer file size

When working with multiple layers, it's important to keep in mind that each layer you add to a photo increases the file size by the amount of the original photo, depending on what objects are on the layer. That means that a photo with three layers may be up to three times the size of the same photo with one layer. Working with large files can slow the operations of PhotoDeluxe Business.

To track file size:

Do one of the following:

•  If your photo is stored in a gallery, locate the thumbnail in the gallery and click its title. A pop-up window lists the file size (along with other information). Click anywhere to close the pop-up window. For help on using galleries, see Organizing your photos.

•  If your photo is not stored in a gallery, in Windows Explorer, click the file with the right mouse button, and then choose Properties to check the file size of the photo. Remember that the values at the bottom of the PhotoDeluxe Business window represent the in-memory size.

See also:

Deleting a layer

Merging layers


Duplicating a layer
Working with layers
Duplicating a layer

You can duplicate any layer in the same photo, or you can copy the duplicate layer to a new photo. To copy a layer to another photo, see Copying a layer between photos.

To duplicate a layer:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  Click the layer name in the Layers palette.

3  Choose one of these options:

•  Drag the layer from the Layers palette to the active photo window.

•  Drag the layer from the Layers palette to the New Layer icon at the bottom of the Layers palette.

• Choose Edit > Duplicate with nothing selected in the photo. If you use this method, the new layer is offset from the original, but you can position it anywhere you like by dragging.


Copying a layer between photos
Working with layers
Copying a layer between photos

You can drag any layer or photo into another photo, creating a new layer in that photo. To copy a selection between photos without creating a new layer, see Copying a selection from one photo to another.

To create a new layer using a photo from the Hold Photo area:

1  Locate the photo you want in the photo organizer window or in the Hold Photo area and drag it into the photo window.

Note: You must have at least one held photo in order to see the Hold Photo area. For more information, see Holding a photo. For information about the photo organizer, see About the photo organizer .

A copy of the photo from the photo organizer or Hold Photo appears as a new layer.

2  If you want to change the name of the layer or vary its opacity or blending mode, double-click the new layer in the Layers palette. Type a name for the layer, type a percentage for Opacity, and select a blending mode. Then click OK. For help on displaying the Layers palette, see Looking at the Layers palette. For help on blending modes, see Blending layers.

Note: If the photo from Hold Photo had multiple layers, they will be merged into a single new layer in the photo window. In addition, if the dimensions of the photo from Hold Photo are bigger than those of the photo in the photo window, PhotoDeluxe Business reduces the size of the photo from Hold Photo when creating the new layer. If you don't want PhotoDeluxe Business to resize the photo for the new layer, use the method below.

To copy a layer from another photo window:

1  Open the two photos that you want to combine with layers. For more help, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

2  With long menus displayed, choose Window > Tile. For more help, see Using long menus.

3  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

4  If the source photo (the one from which you want to drag a picture) has more than one layer, click the layer you want in the Layers palette to make it active.

5  Do one of the following:

•  Drag the layer from the Layers palette and drop it on the photo window of the destination photo (the one to which you want to add a layer).

•  Make sure the Move button or Object selection tool is selected in the Selections palette. For more help, see Choosing a selection tool. From the photo window of the source photo, drag the layer you want to move and drop it on the photo window of the destination photo (the one to which you want to add a layer).

If the source photo has only one layer, the entire photo is copied into a layer in the destination photo. The source photo is not affected.

6  If you want to change the name of the layer or vary its opacity or blending mode, double-click the new layer in the Layers palette. Adjust the settings as desired, and then click OK. For more help on blending modes, see Blending layers.


Moving a layer
Working with layers
Moving a layer

You can move a layer by dragging it with the Object selection tool or the Move button. The Object selection tool is the simplest to use, but the Move button is helpful if the layer you want to move is difficult to see; for example, if it's hidden behind other layers.

To move a layer with the Object selection tool:

1  Select the Object selection tool as explained in Choosing a selection tool.

2  Position the pointer over a part of your photo that contains an item on the layer you want to move.

3  Drag to move the layer into place. To make the layer move in a straight line up, down, or diagonally, hold down the Shift key as you drag.

4  Press Enter to complete the move.

To move a layer with the Move button:

1  With the Selections palette visible, choose any tool from the menu at the top of the palette except the Object selection tool.

2  Click the Move button in the Selections palette.

3  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

4  In the Layers palette, click the layer that you want to move.

5  Drag anywhere in the photo to move the layer into place. To make the layer move in a straight line up, down, or diagonally, hold down the Shift key as you drag.

Any layer areas that are dragged out of the window are still available until you edit the pixels in the layer (for example, by rotating them or changing their opacity).

 When the Move button is selected, you can use the arrow keys to move the layer contents in 1-pixel increments. Press Shift and an arrow key to move the layer in 10-pixel increments.

See also:

Rearranging the order of layers


Rearranging the order of layers
Working with layers
Rearranging the order of layers

You can change the stacking order of layers either with the Layers palette, the Object-order menu at the top of the photo window, or the Select menu on the menu bar (if visible). To rearrange the stacking order of different text objects, you must use the first method below.

To change the order of Layers or text objects using the Object-order menu:

1  Select the Object selection tool as explained in Choosing a selection tool.

2  To select a layer, click an object in the photo that is on the layer you want to move. To select a text object, click inside the text.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Object-order menu [image] at the top of the photo window.

•  With long menus displayed, click the Select menu. For more help, see Using long menus.

4  Choose the direction you want the layer to move:

•  Send To Back moves the layer to the bottom of the stack.

•  Send Back One moves the layer down one layer.

•  Bring Forward One moves the layer up one layer.

•  Bring To Front moves the layer to the top of the stack.

Note: These commands only work on text if you have multiple text objects. You can rearrange the stacking order of text blocks in relation to one another, but all the text remains on top of all other layers.

To change the order of layers using the Layers palette:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  In the Layers palette, drag the layer that you want to move up or down in the Layers area.


Viewing a layer
Working with layers
Viewing a layer

You can make layers temporarily invisible to speed performance as you edit or print other parts of the image. Only visible layers are printed.

You cannot hide all layers—one layer must always be visible; therefore, if you have only one layer, you cannot hide it. Unlike other layers, you cannot select, delete, or change the stacking order of the Text layer. To select text, click it in the photo window.

To show or hide a layer:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  Click the leftmost column of the Layers palette. When the eye is visible, the layer is visible; when the eye is hidden, the layer is hidden.

To hide all layers but one, hold down the Alt key and click the leftmost column of the Layers palette for the layer you want to remain visible. Alt-click again to show all layers.

Note: You cannot hide or show layers when you are working in a guided activity. Complete the guided activity (click Done) first.


Deleting a layer
Working with layers
Deleting a layer

Because layers increase a photo's file size and slow down editing and saving operations, it's important to delete layers that you no longer need.

To delete a layer using the Object selection tool:

1  Select the Object selection tool as explained in Choosing a selection tool.

2  Click an object in the photo that is on the layer you want to delete.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click Edit > Delete. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Click the Trash Can button ( [image]) at the top of the photo window.

To delete a layer using the Layers palette:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  In the Layers palette, select the layer you want to delete.

3  Do one of the following:

•  In the Layers palette, drag the layer to the Trash Can button.

•  In the Layers palette, click the Trash Can button.

•  Choose Delete Layer from the Layers palette menu.


Merging layers
Working with layers
Merging layers

You can reduce a file's size by merging layers. However, you should merge layers only when you are sure you no longer want to edit the layers independently.

To merge layers:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  Hide any layers that you don't want to merge. For more help, see Viewing a layer.

3  Select one of the visible layers in the Layers palette.

4  Choose Merge Layers from the Layers palette menu (the arrow in the upper right corner of the palette).


Blending layers
Working with layers
Blending layers

You can use the Blend and Opacity options in the Layer Options dialog box to blend photos on layers and to create a variety of unique and interesting effects. The Blend options control how the photo on a layer blends with the photo below it. The Opacity option lets you make a photo semitransparent so that the photo on the layer below shows through. You can set these options when you create a new layer. You can also change these settings at any time.

To set layer options:

1  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

2  In the Layers palette, double-click the name of the layer you want to modify.

3  If desired, type a new name for the layer.

4  Type a percentage for Opacity.

5  Select a blending mode. Then click OK. For more help, see Selecting a blending mode.

See also:

Working with layers


Selecting a blending mode
Working with layers
Selecting a blending mode

When creating an outline or a filled selection you can control how the colors in the outline or fill blend with the colors in your photo. You can also control how photos on different layers blend in a multilayered document.

When using blending modes, it's helpful to think of the effects in terms of the following three colors:

•  The base color is the original color in the photo.

•  The blend color is the color being blended (either the color you selected from the Color Picker or the colors in the layer you are blending).

•  The result color is the color resulting from the blend.

Click a mode name below for an example:

Darken mode

Lighten mode

Overlay mode

Difference mode

Color mode


Darken mode
Selecting a blending mode
Darken mode

Darken mode blends the base and blend colors to create a darker color. Blending any color with black produces black. Blending any color with white leaves the color unchanged. The effect is similar to drawing on the image with multiple felt-tipped pens.

Layer example:

Fill example:

See also:

Lighten mode

Overlay mode

Difference mode

Color mode


Lighten mode
Selecting a blending mode
Lighten mode

Lighten mode blends the base and blend colors to create a lighter color. Using the Lighten mode with 100% black leaves the color unchanged. Using it with 100% white produces white. The effect is similar to painting over the image with bleach.

Layer example:

Fill example:

See also:

Darken mode

Overlay mode

Difference mode

Color mode


Overlay mode
Selecting a blending mode
Overlay mode

Overlay mode multiplies or screens the colors, depending on the base color. Patterns or colors overlay the existing pixels while preserving the highlights and shadows of the base color. The base color is not replaced but is mixed with the blend color to reflect the lightness or darkness of the original color.

Layer example:

Fill example:

See also:

Darken mode

Lighten mode

Difference mode

Color mode


Difference mode
Selecting a blending mode
Difference mode

Most color digital photos are composed of three versions of the photo—a red version, a blue version, and a green version. By combining these versions—called channels—the computer constructs all the colors in your photo. Difference mode looks at the color information in each channel and subtracts either the blend color from the base color or the base color from the blend color, depending on which has the greater brightness.

Layer example:

Fill example:

See also:

Darken mode

Lighten mode

Overlay mode

Color mode


Color mode
Selecting a blending mode
Color mode

Color mode creates a result color with the lightness of the base color and the hue and saturation of the blend color. This preserves the gray levels in the image and is useful for coloring black-and-white images and for tinting color images.

Layer example:

Fill example:

See also:

Darken mode

Lighten mode

Overlay mode

Difference mode


Touching up a photo

Click any of the following topics to learn about the many tools PhotoDeluxe Business provides for modifying a photo:

Duplicating an area

Deleting a selection

Deleting the background

Filling a selection

Creating a gradient fill

Creating a drop shadow

Feathering a selection

Outlining a selection

Changing a color photo into black and white

Adding text to a photo

Working with text

Painting and editing tools

Using special effects


Duplicating an area
Touching up a photo
Duplicating an area

The following topics explain how to duplicate an area of a photo:

Moving and copying a selection

Using the Clone tool

Duplicating a photo or selection

Duplicating a layer

Copying a layer between photos


Moving and copying a selection
Duplicating an area
Moving and copying a selection

Copying places a duplicate of the selected area in a storage area called the Clipboard. The selection stays on the Windows Clipboard until you copy or cut something else.

Note: The Windows Clipboard makes the selection available to other Windows programs, as long as the File > Preferences > Export Clipboard is selected.

To move a selection:

1  Make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Make sure the New or Move button is selected in the Selections palette or choose a selection tool from the Select > Selection Tools menu. For more help, see Choosing a selection tool.

Note: You cannot use the Object selection tool for this task.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Move the pointer inside the selection, and drag to move it.

•  To move the selection in any direction by 1 pixel, press an arrow key on the keyboard. To move the selection by 10 pixels, hold down the Shift key as you press an arrow key.

Note: When you move a selection, the selection becomes a temporary layer known as a floating selection. You can see this temporary layer represented in the Layers palette. When you deselect the selection, the temporary layer is merged into the layer beneath it. For more help on layers, see About layers. To convert a floating selection into a layer, see Turning a floating selection into a layer.

To copy a selection to the Clipboard:

1  Make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Copy button.

•  Choose Edit > Copy. For more help, see Using menus.

See also:

Copying a selection between applications

Copying a selection from one photo to another

Pasting into another selection


Copying a selection between applications
Moving and copying a selection
Copying a selection between applications

If you use the Cut or Copy buttons on the Edit tab to cut or copy a selection, the selection remains on the Clipboard until you copy or cut another selection. You can use the Export Clipboard option to make the contents of the Clipboard available to other applications when you quit PhotoDeluxe Business. This option converts the Clipboard's contents to bitmap format and lets you paste them into a document created in another application. (The other application must be able to paste a bitmap.)

To make the Clipboard's contents available to other applications:

1  Choose File > Preferences. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Make sure that a check mark appears next to the Export Clipboard. If you don't see a check mark, click Export Clipboard.

To copy a selection between applications:

1  Make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Copy a selection as explained in Moving and copying a selection.

3  In the other applications, choose Edit > Paste or that application's equivalent option.

See also:

Copying a selection from one photo to another

Pasting into another selection


Copying a selection from one photo to another
Moving and copying a selection
Copying a selection from one photo to another

You can use Copy and Paste to copy a selection from one photo to another. To learn how to make selections, see Making a selection. A pasted selection maintains the same pixel dimensions it had in its original photo. If you copy and paste a selection between photos that have different resolutions, the pasted selection may appear out of proportion to the new image. To match the images, use the Photo Size command to make both images the same resolution before copying and pasting. For more help, see Transforming a photo or Changing the size of a photo.

To copy a selection from one photo to another:

1  Copy a selection to the Clipboard. For more help, see Moving and copying a selection.

2  Open the photo into which you want to paste the selection. For more help, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Paste button.

•  Choose Edit > Paste.

4  The selection becomes a new layer in the photo and is selected as an object (as if you clicked it with the Object selection tool). Move the layer to the desired position. When you are finished, deselect the selection. For more help, see Working with layers.

See also:

Copying a selection between applications

Pasting into another selection


Pasting into another selection;Paste Into command;selecting:pasting into
Moving and copying a selection
Pasting into another selection

You can paste a cut or copied selection (the source selection) inside another selection in the photo (the target selection).

Original	Target selection

Final composition

To paste one selection into another:

1  Cut or copy a selection to the Clipboard. For more help, see Moving and copying a selection.

2  If you want to paste the selection into another photo, open the other photo. For more help, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

3  Select the part of the photo into which you want to paste the selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

4  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Paste Into button.

•  Choose Edit > Paste Into. For more help, see Using menus.

5  Make sure the New or Move button is selected in the Selections palette or choose a selection tool from the Select > Selection Tools menu. For more help, see Choosing a selection tool.

6  Drag inside the selection border until the part you want to see is in the target selection.

7  Deselect the selection. For more help, see Selecting and deselecting an entire photo.

See also:

Copying a selection between applications

Copying a selection from one photo to another


Using the Clone tool
Duplicating an area
Using the Clone tool

The Clone tool lets you copy an area of your photo by dragging, in effect painting with a copy of the photo instead of with a single color.

To use the Clone tool:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Clone button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Clone. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Zoom in if you need to. For more help, see Zooming.

3  Drag the source point [image] and move it to the area of the photo you want to copy.

4  Select a brush size from the Clone palette.

5  Position the pointer on the photo, and then click and drag the mouse to paint a copy.

As you paint, the brush begins copying from the source point. A cross hair moves around the area you are cloning. If you release the mouse button and start dragging again, the brush starts copying from the source point again. To make a perfect duplicate of an area, don't release the mouse button until you're finished making the copy. To copy a solid area or texture, release the mouse button repeatedly and paint in smaller strokes.

6  If desired, repeat steps 3 through 5 to copy from another area.

For instructions on how to change the opacity as you paint, see Painting and editing tool shortcuts.

To use the Clone tool to copy from one layer to another:

1  Display the Layers palette as explained in Looking at the Layers Palette.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Clone button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Clone.

3  Zoom in if you need to. For more help, see Zooming.

4  In the Layers palette, click the layer you want to copy from.

5  Drag the source point [image] and move it to the area of the photo you want to copy.

6  Select a brush size from the Clone palette.

7  In the Layers palette, click the layer you want to copy to.

8  Position the pointer on the photo. Click the left mouse button and drag to paint a copy.

9  If desired, repeat steps 4 through 8 to copy from another area.

 You can also use the Clone tool to copy from one photo to another. First, open the photos as explained in Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business. Then, click the title bar of the photo from which you want to copy to make it the active photo window. Follow the steps above to select the Clone tool, and then paint in the second photo.

See also:

Duplicating an area

Moving and copying a selection

Duplicating a photo or selection


Duplicating a photo or selection
Duplicating an area
Duplicating a photo or selection

Use the Duplicate button or command to make a copy of a selection or entire photo. If nothing is selected, the Duplicate button copies the entire photo. If you use the Cut or Copy button or command, the selected area is placed in a storage area called the Clipboard, from which you can paste the selected area into the same photo or another photo. The selection stays on the Clipboard until you copy or cut something else.

Selection	Entire photo

To duplicate a photo or selection:

1  To duplicate one area of a photo, make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection. If nothing is selected, the active layer or entire photo will be duplicated. For more help, see About layers.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Duplicate button.

•  Choose Edit > Duplicate. For more help, see Using menus.

The duplicated selection (or layer or entire photo) appears as a new layer offset from the original location and selected as an object (as if you clicked it with the Object selection tool).

3  Drag the selection to the desired position or use the Object selection tool to transform it as explained in Transforming a photo.

 You can also duplicate a selected area by holding down Alt as you drag the selection. If multiple areas are selected, all the selected areas move as you drag. As long as Alt is held down, each time you release the mouse button and begin dragging again, you create a new duplicate. This method creates a floating selection (a temporary layer) rather than a new layer. The floating selection is merged into the layer below when you deselect it. For help on deselecting, see Selecting and deselecting an entire photo.

For other ways to duplicate, see Duplicating an area.

See also:

Moving and copying a selection

Using the Clone tool


Deleting a selection
Touching up a photo
Deleting a selection

Deleting a selection from a bitmap leaves a hole in the image. If you use the Cut button or command, the selected area is placed in a storage area called the Clipboard. The selection stays on the Clipboard until you copy or cut something else.

To cut a selection and place it on the Clipboard:

1  Make a selection. For more information, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Cut button.

•  Choose Edit > Cut. For more help, see Using menus.

To delete a selection:

1  Make a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Trash Can button ( [image]) at the top of the photo window.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Delete button.

•  Choose Edit > Delete.

•  Press the Delete key.


Deleting the background
Touching up a photo
Deleting the background

You can use the Delete Background button to delete the area outside the selected area.

Note: If you want to change the background of a photo, you can get step-by-step instructions by clicking the Special Effects button, clicking the Collage tab, and then clicking the Change Background button.

To delete the background:

1  Select the area you want to keep. The area outside the selection will be deleted. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Edit tab, and then click the Delete Background button.

•  Choose Edit > Delete Background. For more help, see Using menus.


Filling a selection
Touching up a photo
Filling a selection

Selection Fill lets you fill a selection with a pattern or color. You can specify an opacity and blending mode for the filled area. If you think you might change your mind or if you just want to preserve the area underneath the fill, create a new blank layer on which to fill your selection. For more information, see Creating a layered picture.

To fill a selection:

1  If you want to fill the selection with a pattern, select an area of the photo that you want to use as a pattern, and then choose Effects > Define Pattern. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Select the area of the photo that you want to fill with a pattern or color.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Selection Fill button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Selection Fill. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

4  Under Fill Selected Area With, select whether to fill the selection with a pattern or a solid color:

•  If you select Pattern, click Previous or Next until you see the pattern you want.

•  If you select Color, click the Color swatch to select a color from the Color Picker palette. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker palette is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

5  Enter a value for the opacity of the fill. A setting of 100% makes the fill completely opaque.

6  Choose a blending mode from the Blend menu. For related information, see Selecting a blending mode. Then click OK.

To create a new photo filled with a pattern:

Click the Special Effects button, click the Collage tab, and then click Pattern Fill. Follow the instructions on-screen.


Creating a gradient fill
Touching up a photo
Creating a gradient fill

Gradient Fill lets you create a gradual transition from one color to another. You can specify an opacity and blending mode for the filled area. If you think you might change your mind or if you just want to preserve the area underneath the fill, create a new blank layer on which to fill your selection. For more information, see Creating a layered picture.

Note: You cannot apply a gradient fill to text.

To create a gradient fill:

1  Make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Gradient Fill button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Gradient Fill. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Click the Start Color swatch to select a starting color from the Color Picker palette. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker palette is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

4  Click the End Color swatch to select an ending color. When you're done, click OK.

5  Click Selection to fill the selected area, or click Background to fill the area outside the selection.

Selection fill	Background fill

6  Select a direction. Then click OK.


Creating a drop shadow
Touching up a photo
Creating a drop shadow

Drop Shadow lets you create a shadow behind a selected area. PhotoDeluxe Business creates a new layer containing the shadow. Note that this will increase your file's size as explained in Monitoring layer file size. Keeping the shadow on a separate layer permits you to move the shadow anytime you want, as explained in Moving a layer. It also lets you edit the shadow. For example, you may want to blur the shadow layer using the Soften command to give the shadow a softer look, or use the Brightness/Contrast command to make the shadow darker or lighter. To convert to a single-layer picture, see Merging layers.

To have PhotoDeluxe Business guide you as you make a drop shadow:

Click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, click the Drop Shadow button, and follow the instructions on-screen.

To create a drop shadow on your own:

1  Select the area for which you want to create the drop shadow. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Drop Shadow button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Drop Shadow. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Under Offset, select how far the shadow extends beyond the selected area.

4  Under Fill, click the Color swatch to select a color from the Color Picker palette. To select a color from the photo, click the color you want in the photo window when the palette is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

5  Enter an opacity for the drop shadow.

6  Under Direction, select a direction for the drop shadow, and click OK.


Feathering a selection
Touching up a photo
Feathering a selection

The effect of feathering fades the edges of a selection, creating a gradual transition from the selection to the surrounding area. For example, you can gradually fade an image to white. When you define a feather edge, you can choose to fill the background or the selection, or delete the background or the selection.

Original

5 pixels	10 pixels

Note: If you want to change the background of a photo, you can get step-by-step instructions by clicking the Special Effects button, clicking the Collage tab, and then clicking the Change Background button.

To feather a selection:

1  Use any selection tool to select the area you want to feather in the photo. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Feather button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Feather. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Enter a value from 1 to 250 for the feather edge and choose an Action option.

4  If you want to fill the background or the selection, click the Fill Color swatch and select a fill color using the Color Picker. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker palette is open. Then click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

5  Click OK to apply the effect.


Outlining a selection
Touching up a photo
Outlining a selection

The Outline button or command lets you create a colored border around an entire photo or a selection.

Entire photo	Selection

Note: When you outline an entire photo, the border is drawn inside the edges of the photo. If you want the border to be drawn outside the entire photo, increase the canvas size to make room for the border, and then outline the photo. For more help, see Changing the canvas size.

To outline a selection or photo:

1  Select the part of the photo you want to outline. For more help, see Making a selection. If you want to outline the entire photo, do not make a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Outline button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Outline. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Specify the width of the border (from 1 to 16 pixels).

4  Select a location for the border.

5  Enter a value for the opacity of the outline. A setting of 100% makes the outline completely opaque.

6  For Blend, choose a blending mode from the menu. For more information, see Selecting a blending mode.

7  Click the Color swatch to select a color from the Color Picker palette. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker palette is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

8  Click OK to apply the effect.


Changing a color photo into black and white
Touching up a photo
Changing a color photo into black and white

Use the Color to B&W button or the Color to Black/White command to change color photos into black-and-white photos. If you want to change only part of a photo to black and white, first select the area you want to affect. For more help, see Making a selection.

Note: Even though the picture is black and white, it is still stored using RGB (red, green, blue) colors to represent the grays in the picture. If you want to convert an image to use a grayscale color palette, see Saving a color photo as a grayscale file.

To change a color photo into a black-and-white photo:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Color to B&W button.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Color to B&W button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Color to Black/White. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.


Adding text to a photo
Touching up a photo
Adding text to a photo

You can add text to your photos using the Text tool. You can color, move, resize, and distort text. If you use PostScript® or TrueType™ fonts, text stays sharp and smooth as you resize and distort it. When you save the photo in a different file format than PhotoDeluxe Business—for example JPEG—text becomes part of the photo and you cannot edit it in the new file. For more information, see Choosing a file format.

PhotoDeluxe Business adds the text on a new layer to make it easier to work with. This layer is always at the top of your layer stack. Although you cannot select, delete, or place this layer beneath anything else in the photo, you can delete or modify the text at any time. For information about layers, see About layers. For information about modifying the text, see Working with text.

Note: For text features to work properly in PhotoDeluxe Business, you must have installed Adobe Type Manager and the Adobe font package, which is a part of the PhotoDeluxe Business installation process.

To add text:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Text button ( [image]) at the top of the photo window.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Text. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Type the text in the text box.

  You can also paste in text from a word processor, but formatting and font styles will not be used by PhotoDeluxe Business.

The type automatically wraps (starts a new line) in the dialog box, but will appear as a single line in the photo unless you press Enter.

3  For Font, select the typeface that you want.

4  For Size, type a point size from 4 to 1000.

5  For Alignment, click the icon that represents the relative position you want for the beginning of each line of type. The bottom three options make your text read from top to bottom, aligning the beginning of lines as shown in the button icon.

6  Click the Color swatch to select a color for your type from the Color Picker palette. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker palette is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

Shortcut: To reset the original values without closing the dialog box, click Reset. This is the same as clicking Cancel and then reopening the dialog box.

7  When the text is the way you want it, click OK.

8  The text appears as an object on your photo surrounded by a box with small black squares (called handles) on each side and each corner. Use the following techniques to resize and position your type:

•  Position the pointer inside the box and drag to position the text object where you want.

•  Drag the top or side handles to resize one dimension, distorting the text.

•  Drag a corner handle to resize the text proportionally.

•  Hold down Shift as you drag a corner handle to distort the text's proportions.

•  Hold down Alt as you drag a handle to resize the text without moving the center. Alt-dragging a corner resizes proportionally without moving the center; Alt-dragging a top or side handle resizes one dimension without moving the center.

•  Hold down Alt and Shift to distort the text's proportions without moving the center.

•  Drag a rotation handle (one of the four circles just outside each corner of the box) to rotate the text.

See also:

Working with text


Working with text
Adding text to a photo
Working with text

Once you have added text to your picture, you can move it or change it any way you want.

To reposition your text:

1  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected. For more help, see Choosing a selection tool.

2  Position the pointer inside your text.

3  Drag the type into position.

Reposition text	Text in position

To change the words or look of your text:

1  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected.

2  Position the pointer inside the text and double-click.

3  Edit the text in the box or change any formatting option. Then click OK.

Double-click text	Make edits

Note: Although you can rotate, color, resize, and reposition text, you cannot apply many photo editing features to text. The only special effect you can apply to text is to turn it into a Web title (Projects > Web > Titles). However, as soon as you're finished with this project, the text becomes a bitmap and is not editable.

To delete all text:

1  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected.

2  Position the pointer inside your text and click to select the text object. A box around the text object indicates it is selected.

3  Press the Delete key.

To copy text from one photo to another:

1  Open the photo that contains the text you want to copy.

2  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected.

3  Position the pointer inside your text and click to select the text object. A box around the text object indicates it is selected.

4  Choose Edit > Copy.

5  Open the photo into which you want to paste the text. For more help, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

6  Choose Edit > Paste.

To rearrange the stacking order of multiple text objects:

1  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected.

2  Position the pointer inside the text whose order you want to change and click to select the text block. A box around the text block indicates it is selected.

3  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Object-order menu [image] at the top of the photo window.

•  With long menus displayed, click the Select menu. For more help, see Using long menus.

4  Choose the direction you want the layer to move:

•  Send To Back moves the layer to the bottom of the stack.

•  Send Back One moves the layer down one layer.

•  Bring Forward One moves the layer up one layer.

•  Bring To Front moves the layer to the top of the stack.

Note: These commands work on text only if you have multiple text objects. You can rearrange the stacking order of text blocks in relation to one another, but all the text remains on top of all other layers.


Painting and editing tools

Click any of the following topics to learn about the PhotoDeluxe Business painting and editing tools:

Painting and editing tool shortcuts

Using the Brush tool

Using the Color Picker

Using the Color Change tool

Using the Line tool

Using the Eraser tool

Using the Smudge tool

Using the Clone tool

Choosing a selection tool


Painting and editing tool shortcuts
Painting and editing tools
Painting and editing tool shortcuts

The following techniques can save you time when you are working with the painting and editing tools:

•  To draw a straight line with a painting tool, choose the tool, hold down the Shift key, and drag.

•  To set the opacity for any selected tool, press a number from 0 through 9. Press 1 to set the opacity to 10%, press 5 to set the opacity to 50%, and so on. Press 0 (zero) to choose 100% opacity.

•  To set the type of cursor you want to use with the painting and editing tools (standard, precise, or brush size), use the Preferences command. See Cursors for more information.


Using the Brush tool
Painting and editing tools
Using the Brush tool

Use the Brush tool to paint soft strokes on your photos.

To use the Brush tool:

1  To make it easier to correct mistakes, you can add a new layer on which to paint. For more help, see Creating a layered picture.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Brush button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Brush. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Select a brush size from the Brushes palette.

4  Click the Color swatch to select a color from the Color Picker. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

5  Position the pointer on the photo and drag to paint.

6  If you created a new layer in step 1, you can easily correct mistakes as explained in Using the Eraser tool. If you're satisfied with the results, you can reduce the memory required for your picture by merging the new layer with the layer below. For more help, see Merging layers.

For instructions on changing the opacity as you paint, see Painting and editing tool shortcuts.


Using the Color Picker
Painting and editing tools
Using the Color Picker

The Color Picker displays the foreground and background colors and lets you change them by clicking in the color area or in the photo window. You open and use the Color Picker when working with certain tools, such as the Brush, Color Change, and Line tools, or with certain special effects, such as Neon Glow.

•  The foreground color is the color that is applied when you paint with a painting tool (see Using the Brush tool and Using the Line tool).

•  The background color is used in some special effects, such as Bas Relief, Chalk & Charcoal, Note Paper, and Pointillize.

To change the foreground or background color using the Color Picker:

1  With the Color Picker open, click the Foreground swatch or the Background swatch to make it active (outlined in black).

2  Under Color Swatch, click a color. If you want to select a color in a photo, click that color in the photo window while the Color Picker is open.

3  If desired, customize the colors displayed in the Available Colors area below the swatches.

•  To select from a gradient of black and white shades, click the Gray Scale button to the right of the Available Colors.

•  To select from a gradual progression of colors from the foreground color to the background color, click the Foreground/Background button to the right of the Available Colors.

•  To return to the default color area (with different hues arranged left to right and different brightness levels arranged top to bottom), click the Color button to the right of the Available Colors.

4  To add the color you selected in Available Colors to the Color Swatches area, click Add Swatch. If you want to remove a swatch, click the swatch, and then click Remove Swatch.

5  If the multicolored-area options don't suit you, or if you want to set the color using the Windows color picker, double-click the Foreground swatch or Background swatch. Set the color as explained in Using the Windows color picker

6  When you're satisfied with the colors in the Foreground and Background swatches, click OK.

See also:

Using the Windows color picker


Using the Windows color picker
Using the color picker
Using the Windows color picker

You can use the Windows color picker to change the foreground or background color. The Windows color picker lets you select colors from an array of basic colors or define up to 16 custom colors.

To use the Windows color picker:

1  Double-click the Foreground or Background color swatch in the PhotoDeluxe Business color picker. For more information, see Using the Color Picker.

2  To choose a color from the Basic Colors palette, click the color you want.

3  To specify a custom color, click Define Custom Colors to bring up the custom color selector. Select a color by clicking in the color area, by dragging the brightness slider on the right, or by entering numerical values for each color component (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance or Red, Green, and Blue).

The new color is displayed on the left side of the Color/Solid box. The right side of this box displays the solid color closest to the color you have specified. The difference between colors on each side of the box depends on your Color Palette settings in the Display Properties dialog box. For example, if your computer is set up to display thousands or millions of colors, the two sides of the box will probably look identical. If your computer is in 256-color mode, the left side of the Color/Solid box will look coarse, and the right side will look solid. Although the photo will print correctly, you may want to choose the solid color if on-screen display is important (for example, if you want to display the photo on the Web) to avoid the coarse look on 256-color systems. To choose the displayed solid color, double-click the right side of the box.

4  When you are satisfied with the color, click Add to Custom Colors to add it to the Custom Colors palette.

5  To choose a custom color from the Windows color picker, click the color you want.

6  Click OK.


Using the Color Change tool
Painting and editing tools
Using the Color Change tool

Use the Color Change tool to fill a similarly colored area with a color of your choice.

To use the Color Change tool:

1  If you only want to change part of a photo, select that part of the photo. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Color Change button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Color Change. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Click the Color swatch in the Color Change palette to select a color from the Color Picker. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

4  Click the part of the photo you want to fill. All adjoining areas of similar color are filled with the new color.

See Cursors for information on how to specify how similar adjoining colors must be in order to be filled.

For instructions on changing the opacity as you paint, see Painting and editing tool shortcuts.


Using the Line tool
Painting and editing tools
Using the Line tool

Use the Line tool to create straight lines on a photo. You can specify the width and color of lines.

To paint a line:

1  To make it easier to correct mistakes, you can add a new layer on which to paint. For more help, see Creating a layered picture.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Line button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Line. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Enter a Line Width in pixels in the Line Tool Options palette.

4  Click the Color swatch to select a color from the Color Picker. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker is open. When you're done, click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

5  Position the cursor on the photo, click the mouse, and drag. Hold down the Shift key as you drag to make the line snap to 45-degree angles.

6  If you created a new layer in step 1, you can easily correct mistakes as explained in Using the Eraser tool. If you're satisfied with the results, you can reduce the memory required for your picture by merging the new layer with the layer below. For more help, see Merging layers.

For instructions on changing the opacity as you paint, see Painting and editing tool shortcuts.


Using the Eraser tool
Painting and editing tools
Using the Eraser tool

The Eraser tool lets you erase portions of the active layer in a photo. You can't use the Eraser tool on the Text layer. For more help on layers, see About layers.

When you use the Eraser tool on the bottom layer or on a picture with no layers, the background color shows through the parts you erase. For help on setting the background color, see Choose Colors.

Original

Erase layer	Erase background

To use the Eraser tool:

1  If you're working with a multilayered picture, make sure the layer you want to retouch is active. For more help, see Editing a layered picture.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Eraser button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Eraser. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Select a brush size in the Erasers palette.

4  Using the number keys at the top of the keyboard, select the strength of the erasure effect (1 is the lowest, 5 is the middle, and 0 is the highest).

5  Drag inside the photo to erase.


Using the Smudge tool
Painting and editing tools
Using the Smudge tool

Use the Smudge tool to smear the colors in a photo, simulating the action of dragging a finger through wet paint. The tool picks up color from where the stroke begins and spreads it in the direction in which you drag.

To use the Smudge tool:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the Smudge button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Tools > Smudge. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Select a brush size from the Smudges palette.

3  Using the number keys at the top of the keyboard, select the strength of the smudge effect (1 is the lowest, 5 is the middle, and 0 is the highest).

4  Drag inside the photo to smudge the colors.


Resizing and orientation

Click any of the following topics to learn about rotating your photo or changing its size:

Displaying the file size, dimensions, and resolution of a photo

Transforming a photo

Rotating a photo

Flipping a photo

Scaling a photo

Trimming a photo

Distorting a photo

Creating perspective

Changing the size of a photo

Changing the canvas size

About resolution


Displaying the file size, dimensions, and resolution of a photo
Resizing and orientation
Displaying the file size, dimensions, and resolution of a photo

At the bottom of the PhotoDeluxe Business window, you can see how much memory your photo is using. You can also see information on the photo's dimensions and resolution. For more information on resolution, see Image resolution.

To display dimensions and resolution information:

1  Position the cursor on the box in the lowerleft corner of the PhotoDeluxe Business window.

2  Hold down the mouse button to display the file information box.

The box displays the height and width of the image (both in pixels and in the units of measurement currently selected for the rulers), as well as the image resolution.

{tipart.bmp}  To see a photo's file size in Windows Explorer, click the file with the right mouse button, and then choose Properties.

See also:

Units

Using rulers


Transforming a photo
Resizing and orientation
Transforming a photo

You can use the Object selection tool to select a layer or photo and then reposition, resize, or distort it without selecting any additional commands or buttons. The Object selection tool is automatically selected each time you start PhotoDeluxe Business.

For information about layers, see About layers.

To transform a layer or photo:

1  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected. For more help, see Choosing a selection tool.

2  Click any part of the photo that contains a visible portion of the layer you want to select. A box outlines all parts of the layer containing pixels.

3  Do any of the following:

•  Drag within the box to move the layer.

•  Drag the top or side handles to resize one dimension, distorting the layer.

•  Drag a corner handle to resize the layer proportionally.

•  Hold down Shift as you drag a corner handle to distort a layer's proportions.

•  Hold down Alt as you drag a handle to resize a layer without moving the center. Alt-dragging a corner resizes proportionally without moving the center; Alt-dragging a top or side handle resizes one dimension without moving the center.

•  Hold down Alt and Shift to distort a layer's proportions without moving the center.

•  Drag a rotation handle (one of the four circles just outside each corner of the box) to rotate the layer.

4  To apply the transformation, press Enter or click a portion of the photo that does not contain any of the layer's image.

 To cancel a transformation in progress, press Esc or click Undo.


Rotating a photo
Resizing and orientation
Rotating a photo

Use the Rotate buttons to adjust the orientation of your photos. Click the Rotate Left and Rotate Right buttons to rotate a photo automatically by 90 degrees in the specified direction.

To rotate only a portion of the photo, select the portion before rotating it. For more help, see Making a selection.

To rotate a layer or photo by any amount in any direction, use the Object selection tool. For information about layers, see About layers.

To rotate a photo by 90 degrees:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, and then click the Rotate tab. Click the Rotate Left button to rotate the photo counterclockwise, or the Rotate Right button to rotate the photo clockwise.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Orientation > Rotate Left to rotate the photo counterclockwise, or choose Orientation > Rotate Right to rotate the photo clockwise. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

To rotate a photo by any amount:

1  Do one of the following:

•  With long menus displayed, choose Orientation > Free Rotate.

•  Make sure the Object selection tool is selected, and then click the photo or an object in a layer you want to rotate. For more help, see Choosing a selection tool.

A box appears around the photo with handles at each corner.

Original	Rotated

Note: If you don't see the handles, try enlarging the photo window. If necessary, zoom out and then click the Free Rotate button. For more help, see Zooming.

2  Drag one of the handles to change the photo's position. Hold down the Shift key to constrain the rotation to 15-degree increments. When you release the handles, a preview of the rotation appears.

3  Click inside the box to apply the rotation, or press Enter.

 To cancel a rotation in progress, press Esc or click Undo.

If you rotate a photo so that part of it doesn't fit on the canvas, the entire photo will be preserved as long as you save the photo in the PhotoDeluxe Business format. When you print, only the parts on the canvas (the visible portions) will be printed. If you export the photo to a different format that causes layers to be flattened (such as JPEG), then the part of the photo outside the canvas will be deleted when the layers are merged into one layer.


Flipping a photo
Resizing and orientation
Flipping a photo

Flipping transforms a photo into its mirror image. You can flip a photo horizontally or vertically.

Original

Flipped horizontally	Flipped vertically

To flip only a portion of the photo, select the portion before flipping it. For more help, see Making a selection.

To flip a photo:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, and then click the Rotation tab. To flip a photo horizontally (along the vertical axis), click the Flip Horizontal button. To flip a photo vertically (along the horizontal axis), click the Flip Vertical button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Orientation > Flip Horizontal to flip a photo horizontally (along the vertical axis). Choose Orientation > Flip Vertical to flip a photo vertically (along the horizontal axis). For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.


Scaling a photo
Resizing and orientation
Scaling a photo

Free Resize lets you extend or shrink the length or width of a photo or selection. Resize lets you scale a photo or selection while maintaining the photo's proportions to prevent distortion.

Free resize	Resize

To resize a photo and adjust its resolution at the same time, see Changing the size of a photo. To scale only a portion of the photo, select the portion before scaling it. For more help, see Making a selection.

Important: Resizing a photo multiple times can degrade the quality of the image. Because a photo is a bitmap made up of pixels, PhotoDeluxe Business discards some pixels when you reduce the size of a photo or selection. When you enlarge a photo or selection, PhotoDeluxe Business must figure out what pixels to add based on the existing pixels—it can't add any detail or information that wasn't there before. For best results, try to resize a photo or selection only once. For more information, see Image resolution and Changing the size of a photo.

To scale a photo:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and click the Resize button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Free Resize or choose Size > Resize. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

A box appears around the photo with handles at each corner and side.

Note: If you don't see the handles, try enlarging the photo window. If necessary, zoom out and then click the Resize button. For more help, see Zooming.

2  Drag a handle to alter the selection.

3  Click inside the box to complete the scaling action, or press Enter.

 To cancel a scaling action in progress, press Esc or click Undo.

If you enlarge a photo so that part of it doesn't fit on the canvas, the entire photo will be preserved as long as you save the photo in the PhotoDeluxe Business format. If you export the photo to a different format that causes layers to be flattened (such as JPEG), then the part of the photo outside the canvas will be deleted when the layers are merged into one layer.


Trimming a photo
Resizing and orientation
Trimming a photo

Use the Trim button or command to select part of a photo and discard the rest. Trimming a photo affects all layers.

To trim a photo:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and then click the Trim button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Trim. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Position the pointer on the photo and drag to select the part of the photo you want to use.

When you release the mouse button, the selected area appears outlined with a dotted rectangle, called the trimming border. At its corners are square handles. You can drag these handles to adjust the trimming border. For more help, see Adjusting the trimming border.

3  Click the mouse button to complete the trim, or press Enter.

 To cancel a trim in progress, press Esc. To undo a trim, click Undo before doing anything else.


Adjusting the trimming border
Trimming a photo
Adjusting the trimming border

In some cases, you might want to adjust the trimming border or rotate a selection before you crop the image. To carry out the instructions below, first drag a trimming border on your photo, but do not click the mouse button or press Enter to complete the trim. For more information, see Trimming a photo.

To resize the trimming border:

1  Position the pointer on one of the handles on the border. The cursor changes to an arrowhead.

2  Drag until the border is the size you want.

To move the trimming border to another position:

Hold down the Ctrl key as you drag a corner handle.

To rotate the trimming border:

Hold down the Alt key and drag the handle in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.


Distorting a photo
Resizing and orientation
Distorting a photo

The Distort button or command lets you change the proportions of your photo by dragging the corner handles of the photo independently.

To distort only a portion of the photo, select the portion before distorting it. For more help, see Making a selection.

Note: To maintain image quality, apply distortion effects as few times as necessary.

To distort a photo:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and then click the Distort button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Distort. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

A box appears around the photo with handles at each corner and side.

Note: If you don't see the handles, try enlarging the photo window. If necessary, zoom out and then click the Distort button. For more help, see Zooming.

2  Drag the handles to create the distorted shape you want. A preview of the distorted photo appears.

3  Click inside the box to apply the distortion, or press Enter.

 To cancel a distorting action in progress, press Esc or click Undo.

If you distort a photo so that part of it doesn't fit on the canvas, the entire photo will be preserved as long as you save the photo in the PhotoDeluxe Business format. If you export the photo to a different format that causes layers to be flattened (such as JPEG), then the part of the photo outside the canvas will be deleted when the layers are merged into one layer.


Creating perspective
Resizing and orientation
Creating perspective

The Perspective button or command lets you create the illusion of depth by moving two selection handles in opposite directions at the same time.

To apply perspective to only a portion of the photo, select the portion before using the Perspective button. For more help, see Making a selection.

Note: Applying the perspective effect more than once on a photo will degrade the photo's quality.

To create perspective:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and then click the Perspective button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Perspective. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

A box appears around the photo with handles at each corner and side.

Note: If you don't see the handles, try enlarging the photo window. If necessary, zoom out and then click the Perspective button. For more help, see Zooming.

2  Drag a handle to create the effect you want.

3  Click inside the box to apply the perspective change, or press Enter.

 To cancel a perspective in progress, press Esc or click Undo.

If you change the perspective of a photo so that part of it doesn't fit on the canvas, the entire photo will be preserved as long as you save the photo in the PhotoDeluxe Business format. If you export the photo to a different format that causes layers to be flattened (such as JPEG), then the part of the photo outside the canvas will be deleted when the layers are merged into one layer.


Changing the size of a photo
Resizing and orientation
Changing the size of a photo

PhotoDeluxe Business lets you resize a photo while controlling the image resolution. To get the best results, it's a good idea to know a photo's final destination before changing it: Will you be printing the photo on an inkjet printer? Have it printed on a commercial printing press? Sent over e-mail or displayed on the World Wide Web? Your answers to these questions are important because they can help you determine the best size for your file. Consult the topics listed below depending on your photo's intended destination:

Getting the best size for printing

Getting the best size for online use


Changing the canvas size
Resizing and orientation
Changing the canvas size

Canvas Size lets you add work space, or extra canvas area, around an existing photo. You can also use the Canvas Size button or command to trim unwanted portions from the edges of a photo, but you'll find it easier to do that using the Trim button or command. Changing the canvas size affects all layers.

To use the Canvas Size button:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and then click the Canvas Size button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Canvas Size. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Choose the units of measurement. Note that if you choose Columns in the Width menu, the value shown is based on the column and gutter size specified in the Units Preferences dialog box.

3  Enter the dimensions in the Width and Height boxes. The value above the text boxes reflects the new file size.

Shortcut: Return to the original values by pressing the Alt key (the Cancel button changes to Reset) and then clicking Reset.

4  Click a square in the Placement box to indicate where you want the photo to be positioned in the new canvas area.

5  Click OK.


Getting the best size for printing
Changing the size of a photo
Getting the best size for printing

If you are preparing a file for print, getting the right size and resolution are important if you want your image to print with the highest possible quality. Contrary to common belief, printing to a 300 dpi (dots per inch) printer, for example, does not require an image resolution of 300 ppi (pixels per inch). If a photo has too much information (too many pixels), it will take up unnecessary space on your hard disk and greatly slow down PhotoDeluxe Business as well as printing. On the other hand, if a photo is lacking in information (has too few pixels), the photo will look jagged or blurry. For more information on resolution and pixels, see Image resolution.

Note: For best results, scan your photo at the appropriate resolution instead of changing the resolution after you scan.

To change the size of a photo:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and then click the Photo Size button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Photo Size. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  For Constrain, make sure the File Size option is deselected. If you want the proportions maintained, make sure Proportions is selected.

Note: If you want to change only the resolution (density of pixels) in your photo and not the number of pixels (file size), make sure the File Size option is selected and skip step 6 below. As you change the settings for Width, Height, and Resolution, notice how changing dimensions changes the resolution and vice-versa. That's because you're not changing the number of pixels, just their density. You won't see this effect if you have set the units to Pixels and change the Resolution setting, because (for example), 100 pixels is always 100 pixels no matter how densely they are spaced on the page. Finally, note that if units are set to Pixels and you change the dimensions, the File Size option will automatically be deselected.

3  Choose the units of measurement you want from the menus. Note that if you choose Columns for Width, the value shown is based on the column and gutter size specified in the Units Preferences dialog box.

4  Enter the desired Width or Height or both.

5  Do one of the following:

•  If you plan to print the photo from PhotoDeluxe Business, click OK and skip the remaining steps below. When you print, you can use the Image Quality options in the Print dialog box to have PhotoDeluxe Business set the best resolution for your printer as it prints. For more help, see Printing a photo.

•  If you plan to print the photo from another application (after inserting it in a word-processor document, for example), type in one of the recommended resolutions in the Resolution box based on your printing method:

For the best output on:	Use this resolution:

300 dpi printer	100 ppi

600 dpi printer	200 ppi

720 dpi printer	240 ppi

1200 dpi printer	300 ppi

1440 dpi printer	360 ppi

6  After entering the resolution, compare the number next to Current Size to the number next to New Size.

Then do one of the following:

•  If the Current Size is very close to the New Size, it means that the number of pixels is about the same and that the quality will be acceptable. In this case, to have the least impact on your photo's quality, select the File Size option. If the new dimensions seem acceptable, click OK. If you need to trim the photo, see Trimming a photo.

•  If the Current Size is about 10% or so smaller than the New Size, you may not notice a loss of detail. Click OK to accept the changes.

•  If the Current Size is much smaller than the New Size, the photo has fewer pixels than the final size requires, and details in the photo may become blurred. Either click OK and live with the results, or click Cancel and see the topic Preserving photo detail.

•  If the Current Size is about 10% larger than the New Size or more, quality will be acceptable but the photo has more pixels than needed and can slow things down. PhotoDeluxe Business will fix this problem by reducing the number of pixels in the image when you click OK. However, if the photo needs trimming, click Cancel and see Trimming a photo. Then return to this topic to change the resolution and size as needed.

See also:

Preserving photo detail

Disk full errors or unusually slow operations


Preserving photo detail
Getting the best size for printing
Preserving photo detail

The amount of detail you get in a digital photo is directly related to how much information (in the form of pixels) it contains. The ideal time to determine the amount of information in a photo is when the file is created. In some cases, you may be able to re-create the digital photo. Consider these examples:

•  When you scan a photo, scan at the highest resolution you will need, but don't scan higher than you need. If the photo you scanned lacks the quality or detail you need, try scanning again at a higher resolution to get more pixels for the same area.

•  When you open a photo from a Photo CD, select the size you will need. For example, if Default size lacks the quality you need, open the file again using the Large size. For more information, see Opening a Photo CD file.

•  When you take a photo with a digital camera, zoom in or get as close as needed to your subject to avoid unnecessary cropping and enlarging later.

If you can't change a photo's pixel dimensions by re-creating it (for example, by scanning it again), you can make these changes in PhotoDeluxe Business. If you must change a photo's size, plan on doing it only once to a photo. Multiple changes to a photo's dimensions can seriously degrade its quality. If you plan to prepare a single photo for multiple uses (such as print as well as online), keep a backup of the original and make a copy for each use. For more information, see Getting the best size for printing.


Preparing a photo for online display
Changing the size of a photo
Preparing a photo for online display

In preparing a photo for online use, such as in a Web page, HTML document, or email attachment, you want your photo to look as good as possible without taking a long time to transmit over phone lines. Use the procedure below for the easiest way to get the best balance of both.

To prepare photos for online use:

•  To help get your photo ready for transfer over e-mail, or for placement in a Web page, click the Send & Save button, click the Email/Web tab, and then click one of the buttons on the Email/Web tab. Then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  To help get your photo ready for use with Adobe® PageMill™ (Adobe's page-authoring software for the Web), click the Send & Save button, click the To Application tab, and then click the PageMill button. Then follow the instructions on-screen.

To learn how to get more control over the process, click one of the topics below:

Getting the best size for online use

Choosing a file format for online use


Getting the best size for online use
Preparing a photo for online display
Getting the best size for online use

A file's size directly affects the amount of time required to transfer and display it over the Internet. Larger files require more time to transfer. The files you create with PhotoDeluxe Business may be too large to transfer effectively electronically over phone lines. PhotoDeluxe Business gives you several solutions to this problem.

To reduce file size for faster online transfer:

Do one or all of the following:

•  Trim the photo. This reduces the number of pixels and, therefore, the amount of information to transfer. For details, see Trimming a photo.

•  Resize the photo, change its resolution, or both as explained in the procedure below.

•  Save the file in a compressed file format. For more details, see Choosing a file format for online use.

Note: If you are scanning a photo for online use only, scan it at 96 dots per inch (dpi). If you are scanning a photo for both online and print use, scan it at the appropriate dpi for your printer. For more information, see Getting the best size for printing.

To resize a photo for online use:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Size tab, and then click the Photo Size button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Size > Photo Size. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  For Constrain, make sure the File Size option is deselected. (Otherwise the file will stay the same size and the online transfer time won't improve.) If you want the proportions maintained, make sure Proportions is selected.

3  Choose Pixels from the menus. This lets you see the pixel dimensions so you can estimate how large your photo will appear on your screen. On the smallest standard monitor, a photo 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels tall will fill the screen. Other common sizes for full-screen display are 800 pixels by 600 pixels and 1024 pixels by 768 pixels. For more information, see Monitor resolution.

4  Enter the desired Width or Height or both.

5  For Resolution, type in 96.

6  After entering the resolution, compare the number next to Current Size to the number next to New Size to see if you are satisfied with the new file size.

For more information on the Photo Size command, see Changing the size of a photo.


Choosing a file format for online use
Preparing a photo for online display
Choosing a file format for online use

The two formats best suited for online distribution are GIF and JPEG. GIF uses a "lossless" compression method, which means that none of the information in your picture is lost. In addition, GIF can save the file with transparent areas, which is useful if the image is to be displayed against a background on a Web page. However, GIF does require that an image be converted to index color, which uses 256 or fewer colors. Converting to 256 colors can affect the appearance of a photo. JPEG uses a "lossy" compression method, which means that some of the information in the photo is deleted. Depending on the level of compression, however, this loss of information may not be noticeable. In addition, JPEG photos are capable of displaying up to 16.7 million colors.

As a rule of thumb, images in the JPEG format give you the best color and the smallest file size. If your image contains line art or needs to have transparent areas, use the GIF format. To keep file size to a minimum for GIF files, use the fewest number of colors that still gives good results (compare the examples below). For most photos converted to GIF format, the Adaptive palette gives the best results.

JPEG image	256-color GIF image

See also:

Choosing a file format


About resolution
Resizing and orientation
About resolution

Several types of resolution are important when discussing the properties of digital photos. Image resolution describes the density of picture information stored in a digital photo as measured in pixels per inch. Printer resolution is a measure of how many dots per inch a printer produces (in the case of inkjet printers, laser printers, or imagesetters, for example). Monitor resolution refers to the number of pixels a monitor can display as measured by the horizontal and vertical dimensions. Each type of resolution plays a role in the display and printing of your photos and their quality.


Image resolution
About resolution
Image resolution

Every photo you see on a computer is a bitmap—a picture composed of numerous pixels (picture elements) like tiles in a mosaic or pieces in a jigsaw puzzle. Each pixel is a square block of a single color or shade of gray.

Resolution is the number of pixels in a given unit of measurement (usually inches). A photo with more pixels per inch is said to have a higher resolution than a photo with fewer pixels per inch. Higher resolutions allow for more detail and subtle color transitions in an image, but they also mean bigger file sizes.

Low-resolution image	High-resolution image

You can resize a photo in two ways. In the first way, you change its resolution (the density or number of the pixels per inch). Changing the resolution does not change the size of a file on a hard disk because the number of pixels stays the same. They're just packed tighter or looser to fit the new size. To change resolution without changing file size in PhotoDeluxe Business, you select the File Size option next to Constrain in the Photo Size dialog box as explained in Changing the size of a photo.

An image, 23 pixels wide, at 144 pixels per inch (ppi) and at 72 ppi

The second way to resize a photo is to change the number of pixels. This is called resampling. When you enlarge a photo, the computer spreads out the existing pixels. But the computer can't "know" what detail was in the original scene you photographed, so it has to make educated guesses about how to fill in with the new pixels it creates. As a result, enlarging a photo greatly by resampling can result in a blurry or jagged image. To resample an image in PhotoDeluxe Business, use Resize or Free Resize, as explained in Scaling a photo, or use the Photo Size command with the File Size option deselected, as explained in Changing the size of a photo.

Original image

Resize, changing resolution	Resize by resampling

Resampling to shrink a photo (removing pixels—also called downsampling) is not as problematic as enlarging but can result in some loss of detail. Because pixels are permanently lost when reducing a photo, it's best to save a copy of the original before reducing the pixel dimensions of a photo. To maintain highest quality, resample your photo only once.

See also:

Printer resolution

Pixel depth

Monitor resolution

Getting the best size for printing

Getting the best size for online use


Printer resolution
About resolution
Printer resolution

If you are preparing images for print, it's important to understand that printer resolution—that is, the number of dots per inch (dpi) that an imagesetter, laser printer, or inkjet printer produces—is usually proportional to, but not the same as, image resolution—that is, the number of pixels that make up an image and that determine the size of the image on-screen. Most laser printers have output resolutions of 300 to 600 dpi and produce good results with images from 72 pixels per inch (ppi) to 150 ppi.

High-end imagesetters can print at 1200 dpi, 2400 dpi, or higher and produce good results with images from 200 ppi to 300 ppi.

For more details, see Getting the best size for printing.


Pixel depth
About resolution
Pixel depth

Pixel depth (also called bit resolution) refers to the amount of color information available for each pixel (picture element) in a file. Black-and-white photos (called grayscale because they contain many shades of gray) usually contain 256 shades. A photo that displays color can contain millions of color shades. Greater pixel depth means more available colors and more accurate color representation in the digital image. It also usually means larger file sizes, unless you are using a file format that is compressed.

4-bit image (16 colors)	8-bit image (256 colors)

Common pixel depths include the following:

8-bit	256 colors or gray shades; also known as index color.

16-bit	32,768 colors

24-bit	16.7 million colors

For information on converting the pixel depth of a photo, see Index Color File and Grayscale File.


Monitor resolution
About resolution
Monitor resolution

Digital photos are not the only things that are made up of pixels (for more help, see Image resolution); computer monitors also have pixels. Regardless of the print size specified for an image, the size of an image on-screen is determined by the pixel dimensions of the image and the monitor size and setting. A large monitor set to 640 by 480 pixels uses larger pixels than a small monitor with the same setting. In most cases, default PC monitor settings typically display 96 pixels per inch.

13" monitor, 640x480

21" monitor, 1024x768	21" monitor, 640x480


Adjusting the quality of a photo

Click any of the following topics to learn how to improve the quality of your photo:

Adjusting the brightness and contrast automatically

Using the Brightness/Contrast button

Correcting the color

Sharpening a photo

Reducing the impact of dust and scratches

Removing the red from eyes


Adjusting the brightness and contrast automatically
Adjusting the quality of a photo
Adjusting the brightness and contrast automatically

Use the Extensis IntelliFix button and command to make automatic adjustments to a photo's contrast, brightness, color saturation, and sharpness. The result is a broader range of colors and a crisper image overall.

Original	Extensis IntelliFix

 If you have a dark or black background, you may want to trim some of the background off before using this feature. For more information, see Trimming a photo.

To automatically adjust the brightness and contrast:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Extensis IntelliFix button.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, click the Appearance button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Extensis IntelliFix button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Extensis IntelliFix. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

 This feature can also alter colors, so be sure to compare the photo before and after applying Extensis IntelliFix. Use Undo if the color changes aren't satisfactory to you.


Using the Brightness/Contrast button
Adjusting the quality of a photo
Using the Brightness/Contrast button

Using the Brightness/Contrast button or command is an easy way to adjust the tonal range of a photo or selection. For help on making a selection, see Making a selection.

To use the Brightness/Contrast button:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Brightness Contrast button.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, click the Appearance button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Brightness/Contrast. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Drag the sliders to adjust the brightness and contrast.

Drag to the left to decrease the effect; drag to the right to increase it. Values can range from –100 to +100 and are displayed to the right of the sliders as you adjust them.

Shortcut: To reset the original values without closing the dialog box, hold down the Alt key (the Cancel button changes to a Reset button) and click Reset. This is the same as clicking Cancel and then reopening the dialog box.

3  When you've finished making adjustments, click OK.


Correcting the color
Adjusting the quality of a photo
Correcting the color

Click one of the following topics to learn how to adjust color:

Adjusting color balance

Adjusting hue and saturation

Using Variations


Adjusting color balance
Correcting the color
Adjusting color balance

Use the Color Balance button or command to change the mixture of colors in a color photo. Like Brightness/Contrast, this button or command lets you correct the color for an entire photo or selection. For help on making a selection, see Making a selection.

To use the Color Balance button:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Color Balance button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Color Balance. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Drag a slider toward a color if you want to increase that color in the photo; drag the slider away from the color if you want to decrease the color.

The values at the top of the Color Balance dialog box show the color changes for the red, green, and blue components of the photo. Values can range from –100 to +100.

Shortcut: To reset the original values without closing the dialog box, hold down the Alt key (the Cancel button changes to a Reset button) and click Reset. This is the same as clicking Cancel and then reopening the dialog box.

3  When you've finished making adjustments, click OK.

See also:

Adjusting hue and saturation

Using Variations


Adjusting hue and saturation
Correcting the color
Adjusting hue and saturation

Hue is color; saturation is the purity of the color. The Hue/Saturation button or command lets you adjust the hue, saturation, and lightness of individual color components in a photo. Using Hue/Saturation, you can change the overall color of the photo or of selected objects in the photo. For help on making a selection, see Making a selection.

To adjust hue and saturation:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Hue Saturation button.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, click the Appearance button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Hue/Saturation. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Drag the Hue slider until the colors appear the way you want them, or type a value from –180 to +180 into the Hue text box.

The values displayed in the text box reflect the number of degrees of rotation around the color wheel—a diagram showing color relationships—from the pixel's original color. A positive value indicates a clockwise rotation; a negative value indicates a counterclockwise rotation.

3  Drag the Saturation triangle to the right to increase the saturation; drag to the left to decrease the saturation. This shifts the color away from or toward the center of the color wheel, relative to the beginning color values of the selected pixels. Values can range from –100 to +100.

4  Drag the Lightness slider to the right to increase the lightness; drag to the left to decrease the lightness. Values can range from –100 to +100.

Shortcut: To reset the original values without closing the dialog box, hold down the Alt key (the Cancel button changes to a Reset button) and click Reset. This is the same as clicking Cancel and then reopening the dialog box.

5  When you've finished making adjustments, click OK.

See also:

Adjusting color balance

Using Variations


Using Variations
Correcting the color
Using Variations

The Variations button or command lets you visually adjust the color balance, contrast, and saturation of an image or selection. For help on making a selection, see Making a selection. For information about plug-ins, see Plug-ins.

To use Variations:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Variations button.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, click the Fix Color button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Variations. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Adjust > Variations.

The two thumbnails at the top of the dialog box show the original selection (Original) and the selection with its currently selected adjustments (Current Pick). When you first open the dialog box, these two images are the same. As you make adjustments, the Current Pick image changes to reflect your choices.

2  Adjust the color as follows:

•  To add a color to the image, click the appropriate color thumbnail. To increase the effect, click the same thumbnail multiple times.

•  To subtract a color, click its opposite, located in the opposite position on the color wheel; for example, to subtract cyan, click the red thumbnail.

Note that each time you click a thumbnail, all thumbnails change. The center thumbnail always reflects the current choices.

3  When you've finished making adjustments, click OK.

See also:

Adjusting color balance

Adjusting hue and saturation


Sharpening a photo
Adjusting the quality of a photo
Sharpening a photo

A computer cannot add detail that was not in the original photo. But PhotoDeluxe Business can enhance the appearance of sharpness in a photo by increasing the contrast between adjacent colors. In addition, Sharpen Edges and Unsharp Mask work by finding areas of significant color difference (such as at the edges) and sharpening them.

When sharpening an image, it is important to understand that the effects of Unsharp Mask are far more pronounced on-screen than in high-resolution output. If your final destination is print, print a test page to help determine which dialog box settings will work best for your image. For information about resolution, see Image resolution.

To sharpen a photo quickly:

Do one of the following:

•  To sharpen an entire photo, click the Get & Fix button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Sharpen button.

•  To sharpen an entire photo, click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Sharpen button.

•  To sharpen an entire photo, with long menus displayed, choose Quality > Sharpen or choose Effects > Sharpen > Sharpen. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

•  For a stronger sharpen effect, choose Effects > Sharpen > Sharpen More.

•  To sharpen the edges of a photo without sharpening overall texture, choose Effects > Sharpen > Sharpen Edges.

In general, using any of these commands or button more than once or twice introduces excess noise and distortion. If you find you have overcorrected your photo, see Undoing  mistakes.

To sharpen an image using Unsharp Mask:

1  Choose Effects > Sharpen > Unsharp Mask.

2  In the Unsharp Mask dialog box, select the following options:

•  Choose an Amount from 1 to 500% to determine how much the contrast is increased. For high-resolution printed images, an amount between 150% and 200% is recommended.

•  Choose a Radius from 0.1 to 250.0 to determine the number of pixels surrounding the edge pixels that are affected by the sharpening. For high-resolution images, a Radius between 1 and 2 is recommended.

•  Choose a Threshold from 0 to 255 to determine how different the brightness values between two pixels must be before they are considered edge pixels and are sharpened by Unsharp Mask. For images with flesh tones and other areas in which you want to avoid introducing noise, experiment with Threshold values between 2 and 20. The default Threshold value (0) sharpens all pixels in the image.

3  Use the Preview option to check the results in the photo window. When you're satisfied, click OK.


Reducing the impact of dust and scratches
Adjusting the quality of a photo
Reducing the impact of dust and scratches

Use Remove Dust/Scratch to remove defects, such as those caused by dust on a negative or unintended scanner artifacts. The Remove Dust  button and the Remove Dust/Scratches command work by looking for dissimilar colors and blurring the surrounding colors to eliminate the flawed areas.

To use Remove Dust/Scratch:

1  Select the area in the photo containing the defects. For more information, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Repair tab, and then click the Remove Dust button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Remove Dust/Scratches. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

If necessary, adjust the preview zoom ratio by clicking the + and – buttons until you can see the area containing the defects. You can also drag in the preview area to adjust the preview. A flashing line underneath the box means that PhotoDeluxe Business is still preparing the preview.

3  Drag the Threshold slider all the way to the left until it reads 0 (zero) levels.

The Threshold option lets you indicate how different the problem colors need to be in order to be considered a defect.

Note: The Threshold slider offers more control for the colors represented by values between 0 and 128 because this is the most common range for photos. You have less control between the values of 128 and 255. You can type in an exact number.

4  Drag the Radius slider left or right until the defects disappear from the photo, or type a value (from 1 to 16 pixels) in the text box.

The Radius option determines how big an area PhotoDeluxe Business searches to find differing colors. As you adjust this option, the image gets blurry. Stop when you have the smallest radius that eliminates the defects.

5  Increase the threshold gradually until it is as high as possible without displaying the defects.

6  Click OK.

Finding the correct compromise between sharpness and concealing the defects may require you to try different combinations of Radius and Threshold settings. If you can't make the image sharp enough, try reducing the selection area around the defect.


Removing the red from eyes
Adjusting the quality of a photo
Removing the red from eyes

One of the most common problems with photographs is the appearance of glowing red eyes. This effect occurs when an on-camera flash reflects off the red blood vessels in the back of the eye. If your camera doesn't prevent this effect when you take the picture, you can remove the red easily using PhotoDeluxe Business.

To remove the red from eyes:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Repair tab, click the Remove Red Eye button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Use a selection tool, such as the Rectangle tool, to draw a selection border around the eyes. For more information, see Making a selection. Then, with long menus displayed, choose Effects > PhotoDeluxe > Remove Red Eye. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.


Using special effects

Click any of the following topics to learn about adding special effects to your photo:

Applying special effects

Installing a plug-in module

Blurring a photo

Special effects


Applying special effects
Using special effects
Applying special effects

Using the special effects that come with PhotoDeluxe Business, you can apply an artistic or exotic effect, add or reduce noise, and produce many other interesting visual effects. Special effects do not apply to text.

To apply a special effect:

1  Select the part of the photo to which you want to apply a special effect. To apply the special effect applied to the entire photo, select the entire photo. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button. Click a tab that represents the category you want. Then click a button for the activity you want and follow the instructions on-screen. Some steps may involve clicking a special effects button. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, and then click the Special Effects button. Click a tab that represents the category you want. Then click a special effects button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects. From the bottom section of the menu, choose a menu for the category you want. Then choose the special effect you want. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Most effects dialog boxes contain a small preview window. Click the + or – buttons under the preview window to magnify or reduce your view, respectively. A flashing line underneath the preview window means that PhotoDeluxe Business is preparing the preview.

4  Some effects include a Preview check box. Select this option to see the results of the effect in the photo window.

5  If necessary, enter values in the dialog box. For information on dialog box options, see the explanations of individual special effects.

6  Click OK when done.

 If you aren't satisfied with the results, you can undo the effect by choosing Edit > Undo. For more information, see Undoing  mistakes. To cancel a filter as it is being applied, press and hold the Esc key.

7  If you used the Special Effects button in step 2, continue following the instructions on-screen. Then click the Done tab.

See also:

Special effects


Installing a plug-in module
Using special effects
Installing a plug-in module

Plug-in modules extend the capabilities of PhotoDeluxe Business, letting it work with additional computer products and file formats, and adding special effects. Most plug-in modules come with an installer or installation instructions that guide you through the installation process. When an installer prompts you to select the plug-ins folder, locate the folder where you installed PhotoDeluxe Business, and then select the Plug-ins folder. For related information, see Plug-ins.


Blurring a photo
Using special effects
Blurring a photo

Sometimes you may want to blur a photo. For example, you might blur a photo you will use as a background to make the foreground stand out more sharply and to give the picture more depth. Adobe PhotoDeluxe Business gives you a number of tools for blurring a photo.

For specialized blur effects, see Circular and Motion Blur.

To blur a photo quickly:

With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Blur > Blur. For a stronger blur, choose Effects > Blur > Blur More. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

To blur by an adjustable amount:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced Button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Blur tab, and then click the Soften button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Blur > Soften. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Drag the slider or enter a value in the Radius box from 0.1 to 250 to determine the degree of blurring. (The higher the value, the stronger the blurring effect.) Then click OK.


Special Effects
Using special effects
Special Effects

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Bas Relief

Bas Relief transforms an image to appear as though it were carved in low relief and lit to accent the surface variations. Dark areas of the image take on the foreground color, and light colors use the background color.

Original	Bas Relief

To apply Bas Relief:

1  If desired, set the foreground and background colors using the Choose Colors command.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Bas Relief button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Bas Relief button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Sketch > Bas Relief. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set the Detail (from 1 to 15) and Smoothness (from 1 to 15) options and choose a Light Direction. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Blur

Blur eliminates noise where significant color changes occur in an image. For more information, see Blurring a photo.

Original	Blur

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Blur More

Blur More works like Blur except that it produces an effect three or four times stronger. For more information, see Blurring a photo.

Original	Blur More

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Chalk & Charcoal

Chalk & Charcoal redraws a photo using coarse lines on a solid gray background. Shadow areas are replaced with diagonal charcoal lines. The charcoal is drawn in the foreground color, the chalk in background color.

Original	Chalk & Charcoal

To apply Chalk & Charcoal:

1  If desired, set the foreground and background colors using the Choose Colors command.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Chalk & Charcoal button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Chalk & Charcoal button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Sketch > Chalk & Charcoal. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Charcoal Area value from 0 to 20. As you increase the value, more shadow areas are replaced with charcoal (foreground color).

4  Set a Chalk Area value from 0 to 20. As you increase the value, more midtone areas are replaced with chalk (background color).

5  Set a Stroke Pressure from 0 to 5. Higher values increase the opacity of the chalk strokes. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Chrome

Chrome treats the image as if it were a polished chrome surface. Highlights become high points and shadows become low points in the reflecting surface. After applying the filter, you can use Brightness/Contrast to add more contrast to the image.

Original	Chrome

To apply Chrome:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Chrome button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Chrome button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Sketch > Chrome. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set a Detail level from 0 to 10 and a Smoothness level from 0 to 10. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Circular

Circular simulates the blur of a zooming or rotating camera to produce a soft blur. For information on more conventional blurring, see Blurring a photo.

Original

Circular with Spin option	Circular with Zoom option

To apply Circular:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Blur tab, and then click the Circular button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Blur > Circular. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Select Spin to blur along concentric circular lines, or select Zoom to blur along radial lines, as if zooming in or out of the image.

3  For Amount, specify a degree of rotation (if you selected Spin) or amount of zoom (if you selected Zoom) from 1 to 100.

4  Select Draft for the fastest but grainy results; or select Good and Best for smoother results, which are indistinguishable except on a large selection.

5  Specify the center point of the blur by dragging the pattern in the Blur Center box. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Clouds

Clouds generates a soft cloud pattern using the foreground and background colors.

Original	Clouds

To apply Clouds:

1  To put the clouds on a separate layer, add a new layer, and set the opacity to fairly transparent (25%). For more help, see Creating a layered picture.

2  If desired, set the foreground and background colors using the Choose Colors command.

3  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Render > Clouds. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

 To generate a more stark cloud pattern, hold down the Shift key as you choose Effects > Render > Clouds.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Colored Pencil

Colored Pencil draws an image using colored pencils on a solid background. Important edges are retained and given a rough crosshatch appearance; the solid background color shows through the smoother areas.

Original	Colored Pencil

To apply Colored Pencil:

1  If desired, set the background color using the Choose Colors command.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Colored Pencil button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Colored Pencil button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Artistic > Colored Pencil. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Pencil Width value from 1 to 24 to change the thickness of the crosshatching.

4  Set a Stroke Pressure from 0 to 15. Lower values show more of the paper beneath the pencil strokes.

5  The background or "paper" area that shows through is determined by the Background color. To control the brightness of the paper color, set a Paper Brightness value from 0 to 50. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Crackle

Crackle paints an image onto a high-relief plaster surface, producing a fine network of cracks that follow the contours of the image. Use Crackle to create an embossing effect with images that contain a broad range of color or black-and-white shades.

Original	Crackle

To apply Crackle:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Crackle button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Crackle button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Texture > Crackle. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set a Crack Spacing value from 2 to 100 to change the distance between cracks.

3  Set a Crack Depth value from 0 to 10 to change how far the cracks penetrate the surface of the image.

4  Set a Crack Brightness value from 0 to 10 to change the lightness at the bottom of the cracks; higher values add more light. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Crystallize

Crystallize clumps pixels into a solid color in a polygon shape.

Original	Crystallize

To apply Crystallize:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, and then click the Crystallize button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Pixelate > Crystallize. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set a Cell Size value from 3 to 300 to determine how large an area is clumped into a single polygon shape. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Despeckle

Despeckle detects the edges in an image (areas where significant color changes occur) and blurs all of the photo or selection except those edges. This blurring removes noise while preserving detail.

Original	Despeckle

To apply Despeckle:

With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Noise > Despeckle. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Diffuse

Diffuse shuffles pixels to make the photo or selection look less focused, depending on the options you select.

Original	Diffuse

To apply Diffuse:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Distort button, click the 1 Distort tab, and then click the Diffuse button. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Diffuse. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Select one of the following options, and then click OK.

•  Normal moves pixels randomly, ignoring color values.

•  Darken Only replaces light pixels with darker pixels.

•  Lighten Only replaces dark pixels with lighter pixels.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Dust & Scratches effect
Dust & Scratches

Dust & Scratches reduces noise in an image by searching a photo or selection for color differences to remove or alter. For more information about Dust & Scratches, see Reducing the impact of dust and scratches.

Original	Dust & Scratches

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Emboss

Emboss makes a photo or selection appear raised or stamped by filling areas with gray and tracing the edges with color.

Original	Emboss

To apply Emboss:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Emboss button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Emboss button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Emboss. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an embossing Angle from +360 degrees to raise the surface to –360 degrees to lower (stamp) the surface.

3  Set an embossing Height from 1 to 10 pixels.

4  Set a percentage Amount (1% to 500%) to adjust the amount of color within the photo or selection. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Facet

Facet clumps areas of solid or similar colors into blocks of like-colored pixels. You can use Facet to make a scanned image look hand painted, or to make a realistic image resemble an abstract painting.

Original	Facet

To apply Facet:

With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Pixelate > Facet. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Find Edges

Find Edges identifies the areas of the photo with significant transitions and emphasizes the edges. Like Trace Contour, Find Edges outlines the edges of an image with dark lines against a white background.

Original	Find Edges

To apply Find Edges:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, click the Sketch button, and follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, and then click the Find Edges button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Find Edges. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Fragment

Fragment creates four copies of the pixels in the selection, averages them, and offsets them from one another. You can use Fragment to make a photo look double-exposed.

Original	Fragment

To apply Fragment:

With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Pixelate > Fragment. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Funnel

Funnel makes a photo or selection appear as if it were reflected in a curved mirror or curled inside a funnel.

Original	Funnel

To apply Funnel:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Funnel button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Funnel button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Funnel. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Select Rectangular to Polar to distort a photo as if reflected in a convex mirror. Select Polar to Rectangular to distort a photo as if reflected in a concave mirror. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Glowing Edges

Glowing Edges darkens all but the edges (areas with significant color transitions) in a photo to give the appearance of glowing outlines.

Original	Glowing Edges

To apply Glowing Edges:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Glowing Edges button, and follow the instructions on-screen.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Glowing Edges. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an Edge Width value from 1 to 14 to adjust the line weights.

3  Set an Edge Brightness value from 0 to 20 to change how much the lines glow.

4  Set a Smoothness value from 1 to 15 to adjust the sensitivity to edges in the photo. Smaller values show more glowing edges and greater detail. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Cloud Texture

Cloud Texture uses randomly generated shades that vary between the foreground and background colors to produce a cloud pattern. This effect blends (merges) the cloud pattern with the existing photo in the same way that the Difference mode blends colors. The first time you choose this filter, portions of the image are inverted in a cloud pattern. Try applying the filter several times for special texture effects.

Original	Cloud Texture

To apply Cloud Texture:

1  If desired, set the foreground and background colors using the Choose Colors command.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Cloud Texture button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Cloud Texture button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Render > Cloud Texture. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Mezzotint

Mezzotint converts a photo to a random pattern of black-and-white areas (for a black-and-white photo) or of fully saturated colors (for a color photo).

Original	Mezzotint

To apply Mezzotint:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, and then click the Mezzotint button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Pixelate > Mezzotint. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Choose a dot pattern from the menu. When you are satisfied with the photo in the preview window, click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Mosaic

Mosaic clumps pixels into square blocks. The pixels in a given block are the same color, and the colors of the blocks represent the colors in the original photo.

Original	Mosaic

To apply Mosaic:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, and then click the Mosaic button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Pixelate > Mosaic. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Drag the slider or type in a number for Cell Size from 2 to 64 to determine the size of the square blocks.

3  To see what the photo will look like when you click OK, make sure the Preview option is selected. When you're satisfied, click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Motion Blur

Motion Blur creates an effect similar to taking a picture of a moving object with a fixed exposure time. For information on more conventional blurring, see Blurring a photo. For a more stylized look of motion, try the Wind effect.

Original	Motion Blur

To apply Motion Blur:

1  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Blur > Motion Blur. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  For Angle, type in a direction from –360 degrees to +360 degrees, or set the value by dragging in the circle.

3  For Distance, type in a value from 1 to 999 to set the intensity of the effect. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Negative

Use this command to make a positive image negative. You can also use this command to make a positive from a scanned black-and-white negative.

Note: Do not use the Negative feature on scanned color negatives, because the film usually has an orange cast that will prevent PhotoDeluxe Business from converting scanned color negatives into positives.

Original	Negative

To apply Negative:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Negative button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Negative button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Negative. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Neon Glow

Neon Glow adds various types of glows to the objects in a photo, and is useful for colorizing a photo while softening its look.

Original	Neon Glow

To apply Neon Glow:

1  Use the Choose Colors command to set Foreground and Background colors. Objects in the photo are colored with these colors when you apply Neon Glow.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Neon Glow button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Neon Glow button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Artistic > Neon Glow. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Glow Size from –24 to 24. Negative values invert the brightness, giving the look of a photographic negative.

4  Set a Glow Brightness from 0 to 50. Lower values increase the opacity of the Glow Color, obscuring objects in the photo.

5  Select a Glow Color by clicking the Glow Color swatch. Click the Color swatch in the Choose Color dialog box, and then click a color in the Color Picker. Click OK repeatedly to close all dialog boxes and apply the effect. For more information, see Using the Color Picker.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Noise

Noise adds randomly distributed color levels to the pixels in your photo or selection, simulating scanner-induced noise, or the grainy look of high-speed film. You can use Noise to create unusual textures or to make a noise-free area blend into a noisy area.

Original	Noise (Amount: 50)

To apply Noise

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Blur tab, and then click the Noise button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Noise > Noise. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an Amount of noise from 1 to 999.

3  For a relatively subtle effect, select Uniform to distribute color values of noise using random numbers between 0 and plus or minus the value specified for Amount. For a more speckled effect, select Gaussian to distribute color values of noise along a bell-shaped curve.

4  Select the Monochromatic option to apply the noise to only the brightness levels in the image without changing the colors.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Note Paper

Note Paper creates a picture that appears to be constructed of handmade paper. The filter simplifies a photo. Dark areas of the image appear as holes in the top layer of paper revealing a background paper. Dark areas are colored with the foreground color, while light areas are colored with the background color. For help on setting foreground and background colors, see Choose Colors.

Original	Note Paper

To apply Note Paper:

1  If desired, set the foreground and background colors using the Choose Colors command.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Note Paper button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Note Paper button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Sketch > Note Paper. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set the Image Balance from 0 to 50 to control the sensitivity to brightness levels in the photo. Low values add more note paper objects; high values reveal more of the background color.

4  Set a Graininess level from 0 to 20 to control the amount of noise. Higher values add more noise and make the note paper and background appear more textured.

5  Set a Depth value from 0 to 25 to set how high above the background the note paper objects appear to float as well as to set the depth of the graininess (if Graininess is not set to 0). Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Page Curl

Page Curl makes one corner of the image appear as if it were curled up. By pressing certain keys, you can determine which corner appears to be curled. You can also set the color that appears under the curl.

Original	Page Curl

To apply Page Curl:

1  To limit the size of the curl, select the area where you want the curl to appear. For more information, see Making a selection.

2  To select the color that appears under the curl, use the Choose Colors command to set a new foreground color.

3  To tint the curl with the foreground color, hold down the 5 key on your keyboard (during the next two steps).

4  To control where the corner appears, do one of the following (during the next step):

•  To make the curl appear at the top right, hold down the 9 key on your keyboard.

•  To make the curl appear at the top left, hold down the 7 key on your keyboard.

•  To make the curl appear at the bottom left, hold down the 1 key on your keyboard.

•  To make the curl appear at the bottom right, do not press any key.

5  With up to two keys held down (see the previous two steps), do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Page Curl button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Page Curl button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > PhotoDeluxe > Page Curl. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Patchwork

Patchwork breaks up a photo into squares filled with the predominant color in that area of the photo. The effect randomly reduces or increases the tile size to replicate the highlights and shadows.

Original	Patchwork

To apply Patchwork:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, click the Patchwork button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Cool tab, and then click the Patchwork button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Texture > Patchwork. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set a Square Size from 0 to 10 to determine the size of the patches.

3  Set a depth from 0 to 25 to set a maximum height for raised patches. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Pinch

Pinch squeezes or stretches a photo or selection.

Original	Pinch

To apply Pinch:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform  tab, click the Distort button, click the 1 Distort tab, and then click the Pinch button. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Pinch button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Pinch. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an Amount from –100 to 100. A positive value shifts the photo or selection toward its center; a negative value shifts the photo or selection outward. When you're done, click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Pointillize

Pointillize breaks up the color in an image into randomly placed dots, as in a pointillist painting, and uses the background color as a canvas area between the dots.

Original	Pointillize

To apply Pointillize:

1  If desired, set the background color using the Choose Colors command.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, and then click the Pointillize button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Pixelate > Pointillize. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Cell Size value from 3 to 300 to determine how large an area is clumped into a single dot. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Pond Ripple

Pond Ripple creates ripples in concentric circles, as if you threw a stone into a pond.

Original	Pond Ripple

To apply Pond Ripple:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Distort button, click the 1 Distort tab, and then click the Pond Ripple button. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Pond Ripple button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Pond Ripple. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an Amount from –100 to 100 to determine the depth or height of the ridges.

3  Set the number of Ridges, from 1 to 20.

4  For Style, choose a direction for the displacement of pixels:

•  Around Center rotates pixels around the center.

•  Out From Center displaces pixels toward or away from the center.

•  Pond Ripples displaces pixels to the upper left or lower right.

5  When you're done, click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Posterize

Posterize lets you specify the number of tonal (brightness) levels for a photo and then changes each existing color or shade to the level that is the closest match. This is useful for creating special effects, such as large, flat areas in a photograph. The results are most evident when you reduce the number of gray levels in a grayscale image; however, you can also use Posterize to produce some interesting effects in color images.

Original	Posterize

To specify the number of levels in an image:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Artistic tab, and then click the Posterize button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Artistic > Posterize. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Type the number of Levels you want, from 2 to 255. To restore the range of colors or levels of gray the photo had when you first opened it in PhotoDeluxe Business, type 255. To apply the most severe posterization, type 2. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Remove Red Eye

If the eyes in your photo have a red glow as the result of using an on-camera flash, you can easily fix this problem by selecting the eyes and using the Remove Red Eye command. For details, see Removing the red from eyes.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Ripple

Ripple creates an undulating pattern, like ripples on the surface of a pond. For a more distorted effect, see Pond Ripple.

Options include the ripple magnitude and frequency.

Original	Ripple

To apply Ripple:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Ripple button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Ripple. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an Amount from –999 to 999 to determine the depth or height of the ripples.

3  For Size, choose from Small, Medium, or Large ripples. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Sharpen

Sharpen focuses a photo and improves its clarity. For more information, see Sharpening a photo.

Original	Sharpen

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Sharpen Edges

Sharpen Edges finds the areas in the image where significant color changes occur and sharpens them. Sharpen Edges sharpens only edges while preserving the overall smoothness of the image. Use this feature when you don't need to adjust any sharpening options. For more information on using this and other sharpening features, see Sharpening a photo.

Original	Sharpen Edges

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Sharpen More

Sharpen More works like Sharpen, but applies a stronger sharpening effect. For more information on using this and other sharpening features, see Sharpening a photo.

Original	Sharpen More

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Shear

Shear distorts an image along a curve whose shape you define simply by dragging a line.

Original	Shear

To apply Shear:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Shear button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Shear. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Drag the line in the box to form a curve for the distortion. A point is added to the line at each point you drag. Adjust a point by dragging it to a new position, or remove a point by dragging it out of the box.

3  As the image becomes distorted, the photo may pull away from the edges. You need to tell PhotoDeluxe Business how to handle that situation:

•  Select Wrap Around to fill the undefined space with content from the opposite side of the image.

•  Select Repeat Edge Pixels to extend the colors along the edge of the image in the direction of the distortion. A noticeable banding (or striped) effect can result if the edge pixels are different colors.

4  If you want to start over, click Defaults to return the curve to a straight line. When you're ready to apply the effect, click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Soften

Soften blurs a photo by an adjustable amount. For information on using this and other blurring features, see Blurring a photo.

Original	Soften

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Solarize

Solarize blends a negative and a positive image—similar to exposing a photographic print briefly to light during development.

Original	Solarize

To apply Solarize:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Solarize button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Solarize button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Solarize. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Sphere

Sphere gives objects a three-dimensional effect by wrapping a photo around a spherical shape, distorting the image and stretching it to fit the selected curve.

Original	Sphere

To apply Sphere:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Distort button, click the 1 Distort tab, and then click the Sphere button. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Sphere button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Sphere. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an Amount from –100 to 100. Higher values increase the height of the sphere. Negative values create a concave sphere shape.

3  For Mode, choose Normal to distort the photo around a sphere shape; choose Horizontal Only or Vertical Only to distort the photo around a cylindrical shape. When you're done, click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Sponge

Sponge creates images with highly textured areas of contrasting color, which appear to have been painted with a sponge.

Original	Sponge

To apply Sponge:

1 With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Artistic > Sponge. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set the Brush Size from 0 to 10 to change the size of the holes in the sponge. Smaller values produce more detail.

3  Set the Definition from 0 to 25 to control the degree to which the color areas blend into one another.

4  Set the Smoothness from 1 to 15 to control how much the image is blurred by the sponge effect. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Trace Contour

Trace Contour finds the transitions of major brightness areas and thinly outlines them (like the lines in a contour map), similar to Find Edges.

Original	Trace Contour

To apply Trace Contour:

1  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Trace Contour. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  For Level, set a threshold for evaluating color values (its tonal level), from 0 to 255. You can experiment to see which values bring out the best detail in the image.

3  Select an Edge option to outline areas in the selection: Lower outlines where the color values of pixels fall below the specified level; Upper outlines where the color values of pixels are above the specified level.

4  Select the Preview option to see the results in the photo window. When you're ready, click OK to apply the effect.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Twirl

Twirl rotates a photo or selection more sharply in the center than at the edges.

Original	Twirl

To apply Twirl:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Distort button, click the 1 Distort tab, and then click the Twirl button. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, and then click the Twirl button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Distort > Twirl. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set an angle from –999 to 999 to determine the direction and amount of twisting. For example, –360 rotates pixels near the center a full circle counterclockwise.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Unsharp Mask

Like Sharpen Edges, Unsharp Mask finds the areas in the image where significant color changes occur and sharpens them. But unlike Sharpen Edges, Unsharp Mask lets you control the strength of the effect. Unsharp Mask works by adjusting the contrast of edge detail, producing a lighter and darker line on each side of the edge to emphasize the edge and create the illusion of a sharper image. For information on using this and other sharpen features, see Sharpening a photo.

Original	Unsharp Mask

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Wind

Wind creates tiny horizontal lines in the image to simulate a wind effect. For a motion effect, see Circular and Motion Blur.

Original	Wind

To apply Wind:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Transform tab, click the Motion button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Blur tab, and then click the Wind button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Stylize > Wind. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Select Wind for the basic effect, Blast for a more dramatic wind effect, or Stagger to offset the wind lines in the image.

3  For Direction, select whether the wind appears to come from the left or the right. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Accented Edges

Accented Edges accentuates the edges of an image.

Original	Accented Edges

To apply Accented Edges:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, click the Accented Edges button, and follow the instructions on-screen. Note that only one photo should be open. For more help, see Closing a photo or Holding a photo.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Effects tab, click the Special Effects button, click the Elegant tab, and then click the Accented Edges button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Brush Strokes > Accented Edges. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  Set the Edge Width from 1 to 14 to adjust how wide the accented edges are.

3  Set the Edge Brightness from 0 to 50 to change how brightly the edge is accented. When you set the edge brightness to a high value, the edge resembles white chalk, and when you set the edge brightness to a low value, the edge resembles black ink.

4  Set the Smoothness from 1 to 15 to adjust the sensitivity to edges in the photo. Smaller values show more accented edges and greater detail. Then click OK.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Extensis IntelliFix

Extensis IntelliFix automatically improves your photo's contrast, brightness, color saturation, and sharpness. The result is a broader range of colors, and a crisper image overall.

Original	Extensis IntelliFix

 If you have a dark or black background, you may want to trim some of the background off before using this feature. For more information, see Trimming a photo.

To apply Extensis IntelliFix:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Extensis IntelliFix button.

•  Click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up tab, click the Appearance button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Touch Up tab, and then click the Extensis IntelliFix button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Quality > Extensis IntelliFix. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

 This feature can also alter colors, so be sure to compare the photo before and after applying Extensis IntelliFix. Use Undo if the color changes aren't satisfactory to you.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


JPEG Clean Up

JPEG Clean Up removes blocks that are superimposed on the image. You might find these JPEG blocks in images that are very compressed or in JPEG images that have been enlarged.

Original	JPEG Clean Up

To apply JPEG Clean Up:

1  Select the part of the photo to which you want to apply a special effect. If you want the special effect applied to the entire photo, do not make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Repair tab, click the Clean Up JPEG button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Noise > JPEG Clean Up. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Smoothness value from 1 to 128 to control how many JPEG blocks need to be removed from the picture. As you increase the value, the photo is blurred more, reducing the JPEG blocks in the photo.

 If you are not sure if JPEG Clean Up is right for your problem, click Example to see a before and after example. (Note: The Example button appears only when your system is set to 16-bit or 24-bit color.)

4  Click OK when done.

  If you aren't satisfied with the results, you can undo the effect by choosing Edit > Undo. For more information, see Undoing mistakes. To cancel a filter as it is being applied, press and hold the Esc key.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Reduce Graininess

Reduce Graininess removes the dotted, grainy look from images. You might find graininess in photos taken in low light, or images that were scanned from coarse images.

Original	Reduce Graininess

To apply Reduce Graininess:

1  Select the part of the photo to which you want to apply a special effect. If you want the special effect applied to the entire photo, do not make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Repair tab, click the Reduce Graininess button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Noise > Reduce Graininess. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Smoothness value from 1 to 128 to control how much graininess needs to be removed from the picture. As you increase the value, the photo is blurred more, reducing the graininess in the photo.

 If you are not sure if Reduce Graininess is right for your problem, click Example to see a before and after example. (Note: The Example button appears only when your system is set to 16-bit or 24-bit color.)

4  Click OK when done.

  If you aren't satisfied with the results, you can undo the effect by choosing Edit > Undo. For more information, see Undoing mistakes. To cancel a filter as it is being applied, press and hold the Esc key.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize


Remove Moire Pattern

Remove Moire Pattern removes moire patterns (diagonal stripes) that are superimposed on an image. You'll find moire patterns most often in scanned images.

Original	Remove Moire Pattern

Note: If Remove Moire Pattern is not able to reduce the distortion in your photo, try scanning the original artwork instead of a printed article (like a magazine or newspaper).

To apply Remove Moire Pattern:

1  Select the part of the photo to which you want to apply a special effect. If you want the special effect applied to the entire photo, do not make a selection. For more help, see Making a selection.

2  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Repair tab, click the Remove Moire button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Noise > Remove Moire Pattern. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

3  Set a Smoothness value from 1 to 128 to control how much moire pattern needs to be removed from the picture. As you increase the value, the photo is blurred more, reducing the moire pattern in the photo.

4  For Angle, change the angle of the line to match the diagonal stripes in the preview window.

 If you are not sure if Remove Moire Pattern is right for your problem, click Example to see a before and after example. (Note: The Example button appears only when your system is set to 16-bit or 24-bit color.)

5  Click OK when done.

 If you aren't satisfied with the results, you can undo the effect by choosing Edit > Undo. For more information, see Undoing mistakes. To cancel a filter as it is being applied, press and hold the Esc key.

See also:

Accented Edges	Find Edges	Reduce Graininess

Bas Relief	Fragment	Remove Moire Pattern

Blur	Funnel	Remove Red Eye

Blur More	Glowing Edges	Ripple

Chalk & Charcoal	JPEG Clean Up	Sharpen

Chrome	Mezzotint	Sharpen Edges

Circular	Mosaic	Sharpen More

Cloud Texture	Motion Blur	Shear

Clouds	Negative	Soften

Colored Pencil	Neon Glow	Solarize

Crackle	Noise	Sphere

Crystallize	Note Paper	Sponge

Despeckle	Page Curl	Trace Contour

Diffuse	Patchwork	Twirl

Dust & Scratches	Pinch	Unsharp Mask

Emboss	Pointillize	Variations

Extensis IntelliFix	Pond Ripple	Wind

Facet	Posterize

Stitch Panorama

Tips for taking pictures to use in a panorama


Guided Activities Projects
Guided Activity projects

Guided Activities include activities for getting photos, touching up photos, scanning photos, changing the size and orientation, printing multiple photos on a page, as well as creating a complete project. A Guided Activity takes you step by step through a task.

Note:  When you open a Guided Activity template, you can edit the text and photos, but you cannot edit the artwork. To edit the artwork, you must merge all layers in the template and then use the selection tools to select and edit the artwork. Note that merging the layers reduces the quality of the template. For more information, see Merging Layers and Making a selection.

To start a guided activity project:

1  Click the Projects button, click the appropriate tab, click the guided activity button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

2  When you're finished, click the Done tab.

Guided Activity Project	Available from this location

Album Page	Projects > Cards > Album Page

Business Cards	Projects > Cards > Business Cards

Business documents	Projects > Business

Calendars	Projects > Cards > Calendars

Compliment Slips	Projects > Forms > Compliment Slips

Coupons	Projects > Promote > Coupons

Direct Mail Cards	Projects > Promote > Direct Mail Cards

Drop Shadow	Projects > Presentations > Drop Shadow

Envelopes	Projects > Forms > Envelopes

Flyers	Projects > Promote > Flyers

Frames	Projects > Cards > Frames

Holiday Cards	Projects > Cards > Holiday Cards

Invitations	Projects > Cards > Invitations

Labels	Projects > Forms > Labels

Letterhead	Projects > Forms > Letterhead

Presentation Background	Projects > Presentations > Background

Presentation Frames	Projects > Presentations > Frames

Report Covers	Projects > Forms > Report Covers button

Retail Displays	Projects > Promote > Retail Displays

T-Shirt Transfer	Projects > Promote > T-Shirt Transfer

Tickets	Projects > Cards > Tickets

Web Background	Projects > Web > Background

Web Banners	Projects > Web > Banners

Web Buttons	Projects > Web > Buttons

Web Photos	Projects > Web > Photos

Web Titles	Projects > Web > Titles

See also:

Using templates


Extending PhotoDeluxe Business with the Web

PhotoDeluxe Business isn't limited to the software you installed on your computer. Using Adobe Connectables, you can connect to a world of additional guided activities, tips, techniques, technical assistance, and up-to-date resources over the World Wide Web—all at no extra cost.

Note: To use PhotoDeluxe Business resources on the Web, you must have the following:

•  Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0. If you used the Typical PhotoDeluxe Business installation, then Internet Explorer has been installed on your computer.

•  An account that includes Web access through an Internet service provider. PhotoDeluxe Business cannot connect to the Web on its own.

To connect to additional PhotoDeluxe Business resources over the Web:

1  Start your Internet connection software, unless your connection is set up to start automatically when a program tries to connect.

2  Click the Internet button at the upper left corner of the screen in PhotoDeluxe Business.

3  Read the Intro tab that appears, click the Internet tab, click the tab you want, and then click the button you want. Follow any directions that appear.

The tabs that appear when you click the Internet button can vary depending on where you obtained your copy of PhotoDeluxe Business. For example, if you received PhotoDeluxe Business with a camera or scanner, the device manufacturer may add more tabs to the Internet button. Also, some buttons or tabs may display more slowly than in other parts of the PhotoDeluxe Business program, because some activities in the Internet section communicate with distant computers over the Internet.

After you click the Internet tab, the Adobe tab appears, containing the following buttons:

•  Guided Activities—Click to connect to additional PhotoDeluxe Business guided activities. These activities are similar to the ones you find when using the Special Effects and Projects buttons, except that they are stored on the World Wide Web instead of on your computer or on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM. Initially, guided activities are just on the Web, but you can download them to your computer, where they will appear under the My Connectables tab.

•  Adobe's Web site—Click to start your Web browser and go to the Adobe Systems Web site, where you can get information about other Adobe products you can use with PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Photos, Clip Art, and Fonts—Click to start your Web browser and go to the Adobe Studios Web site, where you can get additional design materials, such as fonts, photography, illustrations, and clip art.

•  PhotoDeluxe Business Ed.—Click to start your Web browser and go to the PhotoDeluxe Business Web site, where you can get the latest information about PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Customer Service—Click to start your Web browser and go to the Customer Service area of the Adobe Web site, where you can read updated troubleshooting and technical documents for PhotoDeluxe Business.

See also:

Using guided activities from the Web

Using business guided activities from the Web


Using business guided activities from the Web
Extending PhotoDeluxe Business with the Web
Using business guided activities from the Web

You can download new guided activities from the Web—all at no extra cost. PhotoDeluxe Business contains Adobe Connectables to provide this service to you.

The guided activities available from the Web are similar to the ones you find when using the Special Effects and Projects buttons, except that they are stored on the World Wide Web instead of on your computer or on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM. Initially, guided activities are just on the Web, but you can download them to your computer, where they will automatically be added to your existing Business guided activities.

Note: To use PhotoDeluxe Business resources on the Web, you must have the following:

•  Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0. If you used the Typical PhotoDeluxe Business installation, then Internet Explorer has been installed on your computer.

•  An account that includes Web access through an Internet service provider. PhotoDeluxe Business cannot connect to the Web on its own.

To get new business guided activities from the Web:

1  Start your Internet connection software, unless your connection is set up to start automatically when a program tries to connect.

2  Click the Projects button, click the Business tab, and then click the Retrieve button.

3  Follow the instructions on the Web site to download the guided activities.

Depending on what new activities are available on the Web, you may get new activities for existing businesses, or you may get activities for a new type of business. New activities are added periodically; the Retrieve panel will let you know if no new activities have been added since you last downloaded them.

To use a business guided activity:

1  Click the Projects button, click the Business tab, and then click the Business Guides button.

2  Click the business you're interested in, click a guided activity, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

To delete a business guided activity:

1  Using Windows Explorer or My Computer, open the PhotoDeluxe Business program folder, open the AdobeConnectables folder, and then open the Business folder.

2  Open the category folder of the guided activity.

3  Delete the folder in which the guided activity is stored. Make sure you're deleting the right folder before you press the Delete key.

For example, if the guided activity you want to delete is the Business Card activity for Real Estate, you'd delete the Buscard folder inside the Real Estate folder: C:\Program Files\PhotoDeluxe BE 1.0\AdobeConnectables\Business\Real Estate\Buscard\

See also:

Using guided activities from the Web


Using guided activities from the Web
Extending PhotoDeluxe Business with the Web
Using guided activities from the Web

You can download new guided activities from the Web—all at no extra cost. PhotoDeluxe Business contains Adobe Connectables to provide this service to you.

The guided activities available from the Web are similar to the ones you find when using the Special Effects and Projects buttons, except that they are stored on the World Wide Web instead of on your computer or on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM. Initially, guided activities are just on the Web, but you can download them to your computer, or save a link to them as a favorite.

•  After you download a guided activity, you won't need to be connected to the Internet to use it, because it's stored on your computer.

•  When you save a guided activity as a favorite, you save a link to the guided activity in the Favorites tab. The guided activity will still be stored on the Web, so you will need to connect to the Internet each time you want to use it, but you will have a quick way to access it.

Note: To use PhotoDeluxe Business resources on the Web, you must have the following:

•  Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0. If you used the Typical PhotoDeluxe Business installation, then Internet Explorer has been installed on your computer.

•  An account that includes Web access through an Internet service provider. PhotoDeluxe Business cannot connect to the Web on its own.

To get new guided activities from the Web:

1  Start your Internet connection software, unless your connection is set up to start automatically when a program tries to connect.

2  Click the Internet button, click the Internet tab, click a company or category tab, and then click the Guided Activities button.

3  Click the guided activity you want, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

4  On the second to the last tab of the guided activity, do one of the following:

•  Click Download to download the guided activity to your computer so that you don't need to be connected to the Internet to use it. Then click the Done tab.

•  Click Add to Favorites to add a link to the guided activity in the Favorites tab. The guided activity will still be stored on the Web, so you will need to connect to the Internet each time you want to use it. Then click the Done tab.

•  Click the Done tab if you don't want to use the guided activity again.

  If you think you might want to use the guided activity later, but don't have a need for it right now, click through the guided activity until you get to the second to the last tab, and then click Add to Favorites. That way, you will have easy access to it later.

To use a downloaded guided activity:

1  Click the Internet button, and click the My Connectables tab. (If you don't see the My Connectables tab, click the Intro tab, and then click the My Connectables tab.)

2  Click the company or category for your guided activity, click the guided activity, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

To use a favorite guided activity (located on the Web):

1  Start your Internet connection software, unless your connection is set up to start automatically when a program tries to connect.

2  Click the Internet button, click the Internet tab, and then click the Favorites tab.

3  From the list, select the guided activity you want, click Go, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

To delete a downloaded guided activity:

1  Using Windows Explorer or My Computer, open the PhotoDeluxe Business program folder, open the AdobeConnectables folder, and then open the MyConnectables folder.

2  Open the company or category folder of the guided activity.

3  Delete the folder in which the guided activity is stored. Make sure you're deleting the right folder before you press the Delete key.

For example, if the guided activity you want to delete is the Disk Label activity from Avery, you'd delete the DiskLabel folder inside the Avery folder: C:\Program Files\PhotoDeluxe BE 1.0\AdobeConnectables\MyConnectables\Avery\DiskLabel\

To delete a favorite guided activity:

1  Click the Internet button, click the Internet tab, and then click the Favorites tab.

2  From the list, select the guided activity you want, and click Delete.

See also:

Using business guided activities from the Web


Commands

Click any menu name below to see a list of commands on that menu and get information on each:

File

Edit

Select

Tools

Orientation

Size

Quality

Effects

View

Window

Help

Looking at PhotoDeluxe Business


File
Commands
File

Click any command below to learn more about it:

New

Open File

Open Special

My Photos

Close

Save

Save As

Revert to Last Saved

Send To

Page Setup

Print Preview

Print

Preferences

<Recent files>

Exit


Open Special
File
Open Special

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Get Sample Photo

Get Digital Photo

Scan Photo

Clip Art

Open As


Open As
Open Special
Open As

Use Open As to choose the file format in which you want to open a photo. This command is useful when the photo's file extension (the last three letters of a filename that identify its format) is missing or incorrect, or when the photo does not appear in the Open dialog box when you choose File > Open File.

To open a file as a specified format:

1  Choose File > Open Special > Open As. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Locate and select the file you want to open.

3  For Open As, choose the file's format. Then click Open.


My Photos
File
My Photos

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Show My Photos / Hide My Photos

Show Photo Info

Add Photo to Gallery

Delete Photo from Gallery

Create New Gallery

Delete Gallery


Hide My Photos
My Photos
Hide My Photos

Use Hide My Photos to close the My Photos window. You can also click the close box to close the My Photos window.


Save As
File
Save As

Click any command below to learn more about it:

PhotoDeluxe

Acrobat PDF File

Index Color File

Grayscale File

JPEG File

GIF89a Export

Other


PhotoDeluxe
Save As
PhotoDeluxe

Use the Save As > PhotoDeluxe command to save a copy of the photo in the photo window with a new name. If you want to save a file using a different format, see Choosing a file format.

To save a document using another filename:

1  Choose File > Save As > PhotoDeluxe. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Type a filename, select a location for the file, and then click Save.

After saving, the photo window displays the copy of the file with the new name.


Send To
File
Send To

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Hold Photo

Mail

Screen Saver

Wallpaper


Index Color File
Save As
Index Color File

An index color photo is one that has at most 256 colors. When you convert an image to index color, PhotoDeluxe Business deletes all but 256 colors. The program converts the remaining colors to the nearest match or simulates the colors using tiny spots of the available colors.

The name index color refers to the fact that color information is stored as an index to each color's location in a table of colors—as if to say "color 21 goes here, color 97 goes here," and so forth.

Index color mode is useful when you want to limit the number of colors used in a photo—for example, when you want to use it on a Web page. Index color lets you reduce the file size of a photo while maintaining the visual quality that you need.

Note: Saving a photo in the GIF format also creates an index color photo. For details, see GIF format.

To save a photo as an index color file:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Index Color button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Index Color File. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Do one of the following:

•  To save the file using the default settings, click OK. PhotoDeluxe Business uses colors available on your system to create a set of colors that most closely matches the colors in your photos. Nevertheless, you may see unexpected results when the photo is displayed on a 256-color monitor using a different set of colors.

•  To control the way PhotoDeluxe Business assigns colors, click Advanced.

3  If you clicked Advanced in the previous step, set options as described following this procedure.

4  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

5  For Save As, select a file format for your file. For information on specific file formats, see Choosing a file format. Then click Save.

Palette options

An index color photo uses a color table, or color palette, that contains information on all the colors (never more than 256) in a picture. The Palette options let you control how that palette is constructed:

•  Select Exact to use all the colors in your photo if this option is not dimmed. This option is dimmed if your photo currently contains more than 256 colors.

•  Select System to create a color table using the computer's built-in color palette. (This is the option PhotoDeluxe Business uses if you don't click the Advanced button.)

•  Select Adaptive for the best results if the Exact option is unavailable. The Adaptive option creates a palette based on colors in the photo. When multiple photos are displayed simultaneously, a Web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer dynamically creates a color table using the adaptive palettes. Note that a web browser dynamically created color palette may distort the colors in the image.

•  Select Custom to create your own color palette. When you select this option and click OK, the program displays the Color Table dialog box. You can then edit the color table and save it for later use or use the Load button to load a previously created color table. See Manipulating the color table of an index color photo for more information.

•  Select Previous to convert the photo using the custom palette from the previous conversion. This option is available only after you have converted an image using the Custom or Adaptive option. This option makes it easy to convert a number of images using the same custom palette.

Resolution options

The Resolution options let you designate the pixel depth, or the number of colors available per pixels for the indexed color image. (For more help, see Pixel depth.) The resolution you choose determines the maximum number of colors that are present in the image. For example, if you select 4 bits per pixel, 16 colors can be displayed at a time; if you select 8 bits per pixel, 256 colors can be displayed at one time. In addition, you can click Other to specify the exact number of colors to be displayed (up to 256). The Other option is useful for applications such as silk-screening, in which only a specific number of inks is used.

The effect of reducing the number of colors on the file size depends on the photo's dimensions and color content. In small-sized photos, the effect on file size is insignificant. As a general rule, select the smallest number of colors that will still retain the necessary detail in your photo.

Dither options

Unless you're using the Exact color table option, the color palette may not contain all the colors used in the image. To simulate colors not in the color palette, you can choose to dither the colors. Dithering mixes the pixels of the available colors to simulate the missing colors. You can choose from three dithering options:

•  Select None for no dithering. With this option selected, PhotoDeluxe Business uses the color closest to the missing color. This tends to result in sharp transitions between shades of color in the image.

•  Select Pattern (available only when you're using the System palette) to add random pixels in patterns to simulate the colors that are not in the color table.

•  Select Diffusion for a less structured method of dithering colors than the Pattern option.


Saving a color photo as a grayscale file
Save As
Saving a color photo as a grayscale file

Use Grayscale File to convert a color photo into a high-quality black-and-white photo (called grayscale because it includes 256 shades of grays). When you convert a color image to grayscale, PhotoDeluxe Business discards all color information in the image and creates gray shades based on the lightness of the original colors.

Once you convert a photo to grayscale and save it, you cannot change it back to color. If you think you may need the color version later, make a copy of the file before converting. You can save a copy of a picture using the Save As > PhotoDeluxe command.

To save a color photo as a grayscale file:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Disk tab, click the Export button, click the 1 Export tab, and then click the Gray Scale button.

•  Choose File > Save As > Grayscale File. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Type a filename and select a location for the file.

3  For Save As, select a file format for your file. For information on specific file formats, see Choosing a file format. Then click Save.


Preferences
File
Preferences

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Turn On/Off All Clue Cards

Cursors

Plug-ins

Scratch Disks

Background

Units

Export Clipboard

Long/Short Menus


Turn On/Off All Clue Cards
Preferences
Turn On/Off All Clue Cards

PhotoDeluxe Business provides tips and feedback as you work through Clue cards.

To make sure PhotoDeluxe Business displays all its Clue cards:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Preferences > Turn On All Clue Cards. For more help, see Using menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Turn On All Clue Cards.

To hide all Clue cards:

Do one of the following:

•  Choose File > Preferences > Turn Off All Clue Cards.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Turn Off All Clue Cards.

To turn off individual Clue cards:

Select the option labeled "Don't show this card again" when the Clue card appears.


Cursors
Preferences
Cursors

Use Cursors to choose among different pointer or cursor types for the various tools and set the Color Wand Tolerance. When you click a tool and position the cursor on the photo, the cursor changes either into a cross hair or a circle representing the current brush size.

You can change these cursors to display the icon for the tool you selected or change all cursors to cross hairs.

To set tool cursors:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Cursors. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Choose the desired options.

•  Standard cursors are tool icons. Precise cursors are cross hairs. Brush Size cursors are circles representing the current brush size.

•  The Painting Tools options control the cursors for the Eraser, Line, Brush, and Smudge tools.

•  The Other Tools options control the cursors for the selection and paint bucket tools.

•  The Color Wand Tolerance option controls the range of pixel colors that can be selected with the Color Wand. Enter a low tolerance value to select colors very similar in color value to the pixel you click. Enter a higher tolerance to select a broader range of colors. For more information, see Selecting by color.

Tolerance 30	Tolerance 80

This option also determines the tolerance for the Color Change tool. A low tolerance fills color pixels that have very similar color values. A high tolerance fills pixels within a broader range of colors. For more information, see Using the Color Change tool.

3  Click OK.

The cursor in the dialog box changes to reflect the new setting. When you're using the Brush Size cursor with very small brushes, the circle is surrounded by four dots for finer accuracy.

To switch between cursor settings:

Press the Caps Lock key. Press Caps Lock again to return to your original setting.

If you've chosen:	Pressing Caps Lock displays:

Standard	Precise

Precise	Brush Size (painting tools only)

Brush Size	Precise (painting tools only)


Plug-ins
Preferences
Plug-ins

When you install PhotoDeluxe Business, the plug-in files are automatically placed in the PhotoDeluxe Business Plug-ins folder. If this folder is renamed or moved, PhotoDeluxe Business will not be able to locate all the plug-ins and you will not be able to use the special effects and many other features of the program. If this occurs, you can specify a new location of the Plug-ins folder.

You can purchase additional plug-ins and then add them to the PhotoDeluxe Business Plug-ins folder; the plug-ins will automatically appear in PhotoDeluxe Business the next time you start PhotoDeluxe Business. Most of the plug-ins you add appear as file formats in the Open File or Export dialog boxes, as options in the Select Input Source dialog box (opened from the Get Photo tab), or as special effects in the Effects menu, which is visible when you use long menus. For more information, see Using long menus and Using special effects.

To indicate a new location for the plug-in modules:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Plug-ins. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Double-click a folder, and then click OK.

3  Restart PhotoDeluxe Business.

For information on how to install third-party plug-ins, see Installing a plug-in module.


Scratch Disks
Preferences
Scratch Disks

A scratch disk is temporary disk space used for storing data and performing computations on files during a work session when the random-access memory (RAM) is insufficient. (For certain operations, PhotoDeluxe Business requires that three to five times the size of the file be available in RAM.)

By default, the PhotoDeluxe Business program uses your startup disk (the hard disk where Window is installed) as the scratch disk. However, you may wish to change the primary scratch disk or designate a secondary scratch disk. The secondary disk is used when the primary disk is full. You will want to use your fastest hard disk, or the one with the most available space, as your primary scratch disk.

Note: Don't use removable cartridge media as scratch disks because they are slower than hard disks. Using cartridges as scratch disks can significantly degrade the performance of PhotoDeluxe Business. In addition, you run a higher risk of having image corruption when you use removable cartridge media.

To change the scratch disk:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Scratch Disks. For more help, see Using menus.

2  For Primary, select the disk you want PhotoDeluxe Business to use first.

3  For Secondary, select the disk you want PhotoDeluxe Business to use when the Primary disk is out of space.

4  Under Physical Memory Usage, designate what proportion of RAM PhotoDeluxe Business should use before using the scratch disk. It's best to set this number at 75% (Windows 95 and Windows 98) or 65% (Windows NT) or lower so that additional memory will be available when you to need to use a plug-in module (which enables various PhotoDeluxe Business features, such as applying certain special effects, scanning photos, and saving files in various formats).

The new settings take effect the next time you start PhotoDeluxe Business.


Background
Preferences
Background

When you are working on photo collages or documents that have an enlarged canvas, the transparent areas are indicated by a white background. You can change this to a checkerboard pattern.

To change the background setting:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Background. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Select a grid size for the pattern.

3  Choose the checkerboard colors from the Set menu as follows:

•  Choose Light, Medium, or Dark to use a gray pattern.

•  Choose a color from the list to display the checkerboard in color.

•  Choose Custom, and adjust the colors of the two color swatches to set the two colors used for the checkerboard pattern. To change the color in a color swatch, click a swatch and select a color using the Color Picker. For more information, see Using the Color Picker.

4  When you're done, click OK.


Units
Preferences
Units

Use Units to change the increments displayed in the rulers and various dialog boxes. For more information, see Using rulers.

To change the units of measurement:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Units. For more help, see Using menus.

2  From the Ruler Units option, choose the units you want to use.

3  For Point/Pica Size, leave the setting at PostScript if you are printing to a PostScript device.

4  For Column Size, indicate a column width. Some layout programs use column widths to specify the display of a photo across columns. The setting in this option is used by the Photo Size and Canvas Size commands.


<Recent files>
File
<Recent files>

The File menu lists the last four photos you opened in PhotoDeluxe Business and saved in the PhotoDeluxe Business file format. This saves you the trouble of hunting for a file in a dialog box. For more information, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

To reopen a recently used photo:

Choose the photo name from the bottom portion of the File menu.


Exit
File
Exit

Use Exit to end the PhotoDeluxe Business program. If you have a photo open with changes that have not been saved, PhotoDeluxe Business will ask whether to save the file before quitting.


Edit
Commands
Edit

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Undo/Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Paste Into

Duplicate

Delete

Delete Background

Delete From Hold Photo


Select
Commands
Select

Click any command below to learn more about it:

All

None

Invert

Selection Tools

Send To Back

Send Back One

Bring Forward One

Bring To Front


Selection Tools
Select
Selection Tools

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Object

Polygon

Trace

Rectangle

Oval

Square

Circle

Color Wand

Move

SmartSelect


Object
Selection Tools
Object

Use the Object selection tool to select a layer by clicking the appropriate part of the photo. Once selected, you can move, resize, or distort the layer without selecting any additional commands. For more information, see Moving a layer and Transforming a photo.


Tools
Commands
Tools

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Brush

Color Change

Line

Text

Eraser

Smudge

Clone


Orientation
Commands
Orientation

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Rotate Left

Rotate Right

Free Rotate

Flip Horizontal

Flip Vertical


Size
Commands
Size

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Free Resize

Resize

Trim

Distort

Perspective

Canvas Size

Photo Size


Quality
Commands
Quality

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Extensis IntelliFix

Color Balance

Brightness/Contrast

Hue/Saturation

Sharpen

Remove Dust/Scratches

Variations

See also:

JPEG Clean Up

Noise

Reduce Graininess

Remove Moire Pattern

Remove Red Eye


Effects
Commands
Effects

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Define Pattern

Selection Fill

Gradient Fill

Drop Shadow

Feather

Outline

Color to Black/White

Choose Colors

Negative

Adjust

Artistic

Blur

Brush Strokes

Distort

Noise

PhotoDeluxe

Pixelate

Render

Sharpen

Sketch

Stylize

Texture


Choose Colors
Effects
Choose Colors

Use Choose Colors to set the foreground and background colors.

•  The foreground color is the color that is applied when you paint with a painting tool (see Using the Brush tool and Using the Line tool).

•  The background color is used in some special effects, such as Bas Relief, Chalk & Charcoal, Note Paper, and Pointillize.

Use this command to set the background color before applying the effect.

To set the foreground and background colors:

1  Do one of the following:

•  If you're working in a guided activity, click the Choose Colors button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose Effects > Choose Colors. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

A black outline surrounds the Foreground swatch, indicating it is active.

2  Position the pointer over the color area. Click the color you want to set as the foreground color. To select a color from an open photo, click the color in the photo window. For information, see Using the Color Picker.

3  Click the Background swatch to make it active. A black outline surrounds the swatch.

4  Position the pointer over the color area. Click the color you want to set as the background color. To select a color from an open photo, click the color in the photo window. Then click OK.


Adjust
Effects
Adjust

Click the following special effect command to learn more about it:

Variations


Artistic
Effects
Artistic

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Colored Pencil

Neon Glow

Posterize

Sponge


Blur
Effects
Blur

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Blur

Blur More

Circular

Motion Blur

Soften


Brush Strokes menu
Effects
Brush Strokes

Click the following special effect command to learn more about it:

Accented Edges


Distort
Effects
Distort

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Funnel

Pinch

Pond Ripple

Ripple

Shear

Sphere

Twirl


Noise
Effects
Noise

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Despeckle

Dust & Scratches

JPEG Clean Up

Noise

Reduce Graininess

Remove Moire Pattern


PhotoDeluxe
Effects
PhotoDeluxe

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Page Curl

Remove Red Eye

See also:

Special effects


Pixelate
Effects
Pixelate

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Crystallize

Facet

Fragment

Mezzotint

Mosaic

Pointillize


Render
Effects
Render

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Clouds

Cloud Texture


Sharpen
Effects
Sharpen

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Sharpen

Sharpen Edges

Sharpen More

Unsharp Mask


Sketch
Effects
Sketch

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Bas Relief

Chalk & Charcoal

Chrome

Note Paper


Stylize
Effects
Stylize

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Diffuse

Emboss

Find Edges

Glowing Edges

Solarize

Trace Contour

Wind


Texture
Effects
Texture

Click any special effect command below to learn more about it:

Crackle

Patchwork


View
Commands
View

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Show/Hide Rulers

Show/Hide Layers

Show/Hide Selections

Zoom In

Zoom Out


Show/Hide Layers
View
Show/Hide Layers

Use Show Layers or Hide Layers to view or hide the Layers palette.

To view the Layers palette:

Do one of the following:

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Show Layers. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

•  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Layers.

To hide the Layers palette:

Do one of the following:

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Hide Layers.

•  If the Layers palette isn't visible, click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Hide Layers.

For more information on using the Layers palette, see the following topics:

Looking at the Layers palette

Creating a layered picture

Blending layers

Editing a layered picture

Rearranging the order of layers

Deleting a layer


Show/Hide Selections
View
Show/Hide Selections

Use Show Selections or Hide Selections to view or hide the Selections palette.

To view the Selections palette:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab, and then click the View Selections button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Show Selections. For more help, see Using menus and Using long menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Show Selections.

To hide the Selections palette:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Advanced button, click the Tools tab and then click the View Selections button.

•  With long menus displayed, choose View > Hide Selections. For more help, see Using menus and Using long menus.

•  Click anywhere with the right mouse button, and then choose Hide Selections.

For more information on using the Selections palette, see the following topics:

Looking at the Selections palette

Choosing a selection tool

Making a selection


Window
Commands
Window

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Cascade

Tile

Close All

<Currently open documents>


Cascade
Window
Cascade

Use Cascade to arrange all open photo windows in an overlapping fashion. For information on opening more than one photo at a time, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

To arrange photo windows in overlapping fashion:

With long menus displayed, choose Window > Cascade. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.


Tile
Window
Tile

Use Tile to arrange all open photo windows side by side and (depending on the number of windows) top to bottom. For information on opening more than one photo at a time, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

To arrange photo windows in a tiled fashion:

With long menus displayed, choose Window > Tile. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.


Close All
Window
Close All

Use Close All to close all open photo windows. If any of the photos have changes that have not been saved, PhotoDeluxe Business will give you the chance to save before closing. For information on opening more than one photo at a time, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

To close all open photos:

1  With long menus displayed, choose Window > Close All. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  For each prompt you receive, choose one of the following options:

•  Click Yes to save the photo you are closing.

•  Click No to close the photo without saving it.

•  Click Cancel to leave the photo window open.


<Currently open documents>
Window
<Currently open documents>

The Window menu lists the name of each of the currently open photos. If a photo window is hidden by other photo windows, you can use this list to bring the photo window to the front. For information on opening more than one photo at a time, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

To switch to a currently open photo:

With long menus displayed, choose the photo name from the Window menu. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.


Help
Commands
Help

Click any command below to learn more about it:

Contents

Search for Help on

How to Use Help


Contents
Help
Contents

At any time, you can turn to the table of contents of this Help file.

To see the table of contents of this Help file:

Do one of the following:

•  Click the Contents button at the top of this window.

•  Choose Help > Contents. For more help, see Using menus.


Search for Help on
Help
Search for Help on

You can search this Help file for a topic you need.

To search for Help:

1  Do one of the following:

•  Click Index at the top of this window.

•  Choose Help > Search for Help on. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Follow the prompts on-screen to search for the topic you need.


How to Use Help
Help
How to Use Help

PhotoDeluxe Business online Help is accessible in several ways; it is always at your fingertips.

When you use a guided activity, a Help button appears within many of the steps. Clicking this button automatically opens a topic specific to the step you're doing so that you don't have to look up the topic yourself.

To start online Help within a guided activity:

Click the Help button (?) in the step tab. Not all steps have a Help button.

Whether or not you are using a guided activity, you can also start online Help from the photo window. When you start online Help this way, you look up the topic you want.

To start online Help from the photo window:

Click the Help button (?) in the photo window.

To locate a Help topic in the online table of contents:

Start online Help, and click the Contents tab. Double-click a book icon to see the topics listed within it. When you see a topic you want to read, double-click it.

To locate a Help topic in the online index:

Start online Help, click the Index tab, and follow the directions in the Find box.

To find a specific word or phrase in online Help:

Start online Help, click the Find tab, and follow the directions in the Find box.

If the Find Setup Wizard appears, follow the directions. The Find Setup Wizard appears only the first time you open online Help.

 If you can't see any Help buttons because you don't have a photo window open, you can still use online Help. Just choose a command from the Help menu.

See also:

Using menus

Using long menus


Troubleshooting

Click any of the following topics to learn how to solve problems with using PhotoDeluxe Business:

Other sources for technical solutions

Disk full errors or unusually slow operations

Disk error when starting or operating PhotoDeluxe Business

Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations

Can't find the name of a photo

Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device

Problems opening files

Troubleshooting when resizing a photo

Unusually slow printing

Images print too dark from desktop inkjet color printers

Isolating a printing problem

Printer troubleshooting tips

Scanning issues

Troubleshooting fonts in templates

Screen display problems

A painting or editing tool doesn't seem to work

A selected area is empty

Restoring default preferences

Resetting the Plug-ins folder


Other sources for technical solutions
Troubleshooting
Other sources for technical solutions

Other ways to access technical information include:

•  Study the Read Me file, installed with the program, for last-minute information.

•  Use the resources available by clicking the Internet button in PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Visit the Adobe Web site on the World Wide Web
(http://www.adobe.com).

•  Visit the Adobe Customer Support Database on the World Wide Web (http://www.adobe.com/supportservice/custsupport/main.html, and then click Support Databases). This database contains technical support issues and solutions, including a list of top issues and solutions. You can search by keyword (such as "PhotoDeluxe and not enough memory") or by concept (such as "PhotoDeluxe doesn't print").

•  Visit the User to User Forums on the World Wide Web
(http://www.adobe.com/supportservice/custsupport/main.html, and then click User to User Forums). You can post your question, and other PhotoDeluxe Business users can answer it, or you can answer other users' questions.

•  Use forum on CompuServe (GO ADOBEAPP). Forum and availability may vary by country.

•  Call Adobe FaxYI, a free fax-on-demand system that can fax you any of more than 1,000 technical and customer service documents on PhotoDeluxe Business and other products. Call 1-206-628-5737 (USA and Canada) from a touch-tone phone and follow the recorded instructions.

•  Request technical documents from Adobe by e-mail. All documents available through Adobe FaxYI are also available through e-mail. To receive an index of documents, send e-mail to techdocs@adobe.com with a subject line of 100099, or use 360099 for the PhotoDeluxe Business index of documents.

Note: The techdocs@adobe.com e-mail address is not monitored by technical support personnel; it is an automated system that provides information about common problems. The answer you receive will not be tailored to your problem. If you have a specific question that cannot be answered by these documents, try one of the other technical information resources.

•  For help outside the U.S. and Canada, consult the documentation on your PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM.


Disk full errors or unusually slow operations
Troubleshooting
Disk full errors or unusually slow operations

If PhotoDeluxe Business runs out of disk space, it displays a message and can't complete the operation. PhotoDeluxe Business uses both random-access memory (RAM) and free hard disk space (scratch disk) to perform photo-editing operations. To process a photo, PhotoDeluxe Business requires memory approximately equal to three to five times the file size of that photo. When there is not enough RAM to process a photo, PhotoDeluxe Business uses the scratch disk. Because hard disk access speed is slower than RAM access speed, PhotoDeluxe Business performance slows when it uses the scratch disk.

If you have a disk full error or unusually slow operations, try any of the following:

•  Delete photos to increase hard disk space. For information, see Deleting a photo from a gallery.

•  Merge the layers in your photo to reduce file size. For more information, see Merging layers.

•  Optimize your hard disk using a disk utility, such as Norton Utilities™, or the ScanDisk and Disk Defragmenter system tools included with Windows 95 and later.

•  If you have more than one hard disk, you can assign a secondary hard disk to be used as the scratch disk. Note that you should choose the faster hard disk, if it has enough space. For information on selecting a scratch disk, see Scratch Disks.


Disk error when starting or operating PhotoDeluxe Business
Troubleshooting
Disk error when starting or operating PhotoDeluxe Business

If a disk error occurs when starting or operating PhotoDeluxe Business (after successfully starting and operating PhotoDeluxe Business in the past), the preferences file may be damaged. The first time you start PhotoDeluxe Business, the program creates its preferences file, which contains default (factory) settings for PhotoDeluxe Business.

A damaged preferences file may cause improper tool functionality, unavailable plug-ins, dimmed menu items, out-of-memory errors, or errors when starting. Moving, renaming, or deleting the preferences file forces PhotoDeluxe Business to create a new one the next time you start PhotoDeluxe Business, which restores all preferences to their default settings.

See also:

Restoring default preferences

Resetting the Plug-ins folder


Restoring default preferences
Troubleshooting
Restoring default preferences

The preferences file includes default settings for display, scratch disks, tools, filters, and menu commands. The preferences file also stores the location of the PhotoDeluxe Business Plug-ins folder, which enables PhotoDeluxe Business to find plug-ins located in that folder. PhotoDeluxe Business reads and writes to its preferences file during operation, saving your custom preferences settings. When you exit, PhotoDeluxe Business saves the preferences file on your hard disk, and then PhotoDeluxe Business reads and uses the preferences file next time you start PhotoDeluxe Business.

A damaged preferences file may cause improper tool functionality, unavailable plug-ins, dimmed menu items, out-of-memory errors, or errors when starting. Moving, renaming, or deleting the preferences file forces PhotoDeluxe Business to create a new one the next time you start PhotoDeluxe Business, which restores all preferences to their default settings.

These are the PhotoDeluxe Business default preferences:

•  Clue cards—Set to on.

•  Cursors—Painting Tools are set to Brush Size;  Other Tools are set to Precise, and Color Wand Tolerance is set to 32.

•  Plug-ins—Set to the PlugIns folder inside the PhotoDeluxe Business program folder.

•  Scratch Disks—Primary is set to Startup; Secondary is set to None, and Physical Memory Usage Used by PhotoDeluxe is set to 75%.

•  Background—Grid Size set to None.

•  Units—Ruler Units are set to Inches; Point/Pica Size is set to PostScript (72 points/inch); Column Size Width is set to 15 picas, and Column Size Gutter is set to one pica.

•  Export Clipboard—Set to on.

•  Long Menus—Set to off.

  To save custom preferences settings, move the preferences files to another location (for example, into the Recycle Bin, but do not empty it). If the custom preferences file is not the cause of the disk error, replace the restored default preferences files with the custom preferences files to return to your own preference settings.

To restore default preferences:

1  Exit PhotoDeluxe Business.

2  In the folder where you installed PhotoDeluxe Business, delete the Prefs folder.

A new default preferences folder and file will be created when you next start PhotoDeluxe Business.

3  Restart PhotoDeluxe Business.


Resetting the Plug-ins folder
Troubleshooting
Resetting the Plug-ins folder

If your preferences file is damaged, PhotoDeluxe Business may not be able to find the plug-ins folder.

To reset the Plug-ins folder:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Plug-ins. For more help, see Using menus.

2  Click once on the Plug-ins folder to select it, and then click OK.

3  Restart PhotoDeluxe Business.


Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations
Troubleshooting
Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations

If the computer doesn't have enough RAM to start PhotoDeluxe Business or to save a PhotoDeluxe Business file, it displays an error message. Low memory can also slow down operations. You can increase the amount of memory available to PhotoDeluxe Business by doing one or more of the following:

•  Quit all open applications, and then restart PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Allocate more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Defragment memory by restarting your computer.

•  Restore default preferences. See Disk error when starting or operating PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Reduce photo resolution to reduce file size.

•  Merge layers to reduce file size.

•  Increase the amount of Windows Virtual Memory. For details, see your Windows documentation.

See also:

Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business

Defragmenting memory

Reducing photo resolution

Managing layers

Merging layers


Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business
Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations
Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business

PhotoDeluxe Business uses both installed memory (RAM) and scratch disk virtual memory to perform most operations, but some operations (such as using the Distort filters) run exclusively in RAM. When PhotoDeluxe Business has insufficient RAM to perform these operations, the program displays an error message and does not complete the operation.

Before allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business, make sure you have at least 16 MB of RAM on your computer.

To allocate more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business:

1  Choose File > Preferences > Scratch Disks.

2  Increase the Used by PhotoDeluxe value to no more than 75% (Windows 95 or Windows 98) or 65% (Windows NT®), and then click OK. For related information, see Scratch Disks.

See also:

Defragmenting memory

Reducing photo resolution

Managing layers


Defragmenting memory
Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations
Defragmenting memory

Starting and quitting applications repeatedly can fragment a computer's memory. When memory is fragmented (not available in a single, contiguous block), applications may be unable to access all their allocated memory. Restarting the computer defragments its memory.

See also:

Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business

Reducing photo resolution

Managing layers


Reducing photo resolution
 Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations
Reducing photo resolution

You can reduce memory demands, improve PhotoDeluxe Business performance, and accelerate printing by reducing the resolution of your photo to reduce its file size. If you are using Kodak Photo CD, you can choose from several resolutions. For more information on photo resolution and printers, see About resolution and Getting the best size for printing.

To reduce photo resolution:

1  With the photo open in PhotoDeluxe Business, do one of the following:

•  Click Advanced, click the Size tab, and then click the Photo Size button.

•  With the long menus displayed, choose Size > Photo Size. For more help, see Using long menus and Using menus.

2  In the Photo Size dialog box, deselect the File Size option, decrease the Height, Width, or Resolution values, and then click OK.

Note: Reducing photo resolution may result in lower photo quality.

See also:

Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business

Defragmenting memory

Getting the best size for printing

Getting the best size for online use

Managing layers


Managing layers
Out-of-memory errors or unusually slow operations
Managing layers

Working with large files can slow PhotoDeluxe Business performance. Files can quickly increase in size as you add multiple layers. Each layer you add to a photo can increase the file size by the amount of the original photo, depending on what objects are on the layer. That means that a photo with three layers can be up to three times the size of the same photo with one layer. To manage layers in your files efficiently, merge them when you no longer need to edit the layers individually. For more information, see Merging layers.

See also:

Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business

Defragmenting memory

Reducing photo resolution


Can't find the name of a photo
Troubleshooting
Can't find the name of a photo

If you have problems getting a photo, try the following:

•  Make sure you know the name of the photo. Some devices (such as digital cameras) or storage media (such as Photo CD) name photos using a date or a combination of numbers and letters. If you want to use clip art or a sample photo, you must insert the Adobe PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM.

The following tips apply when you're trying to get a photo from a device other than a computer or a disk.

•  Make sure the button you click matches where the photo is stored. For example, you might not find a digital camera photo in the camera if you already moved it to your computer's hard disk.

•  Sometimes the photo doesn't yet exist as a file. This might be true if you are about to use a scanner or video camera. In this case, clicking the device's button under the Get Photo tab prepares the software to create the photo. For more information, see About scanners and digital cameras.

•  Make sure you have installed the driver software that came with your scanner or digital camera. For PhotoDeluxe Business to list your device, the device manufacturer must include software (such as an "acquire," "plug-in," or TWAIN software module) that makes PhotoDeluxe Business recognize the device when it is connected.

•  Make sure the device name appears when you click its button under the Get Photo tab. If it doesn't appear, set up the device by clicking the arrow under the appropriate button. If you still don't see the device name, the software for the device may not be installed correctly. If you have questions about the software module for your device, contact the device manufacturer.

•  Check the device and media names listed under the Other button. Unless a software module is written specifically for PhotoDeluxe Business, it might not show up under the appropriate device button. For more information, see Getting a photo into PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Make sure the device cable is connected to the correct port on your computer. Before connecting or disconnecting SCSI devices, always turn off the computer and all connected SCSI devices or you may damage the devices.

•  Make sure the photo was originally saved in one of the file formats PhotoDeluxe Business recognizes. A file format is a kind of electronic package that tells computers what's inside a file. To see a list of recognized file formats, click the Files of Type menu in the Open dialog box. If the photo isn't saved in one of the listed formats, it will have to be converted to one using another program. For more information, see Choosing a file format.


Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device
Troubleshooting
Problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device

When trying to resolve problems with scanning or getting photos from a digital camera or other device, consider the following:

•  Make sure the proper plug-in or driver is installed. Make sure you installed the software that came with your scanner or digital camera. PhotoDeluxe Business requires that software to download or scan images. For more information on installation, consult the documentation for the scanner or device, or contact the vendor for the latest plug-ins or drivers.

•  Allocate more RAM to PhotoDeluxe Business. For information, see Allocating more memory to PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Make sure any Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) devices you are using are securely connected to your computer and that the SCSI cables are not damaged. A bad connection can cause problems throughout your system.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras

Scanning a photo

Opening a photo from a digital camera

Scanning issues


Unusually slow printing
Troubleshooting
Unusually slow printing

The resolution of your photo may be unnecessarily high, creating too large of a file for printing. To reduce resolution, see Printing a photo.


Images print too dark from desktop inkjet color printers
Troubleshooting
Images print too dark from desktop inkjet color printers

If images look fine on-screen but print too dark from some desktop inkjet color printers, try darkening your monitor (turn the brightness knob on the front of your monitor) until the image is nearly as dark as it prints, and then lighten the image. To lighten the overall image, try changing the levels in the Brightness/Contrast dialog box (Quality > Brightness/Contrast). In a color photo, if there is too much of one color and not enough of another, try adjusting the Color Levels values in the Color Balance dialog box (Quality > Color Balance) or clicking thumbnails in the Variations dialog box (Effects > Adjust > Variations).


Isolating a printing problem
Troubleshooting
Isolating a printing problem

If you are having a problem printing, first determine whether the problem is specific to a certain computer, a certain application, or a certain image. Use the following questions as a checklist:

•  Can you reproduce the problem on a different computer performing the same task? If not, the problem probably has to do with your computer—the software currently running or memory configuration. It's possible that recently installed software or hardware is conflicting with PhotoDeluxe Business.

•  Can you reproduce the problem in a different application doing the same task? If so, the problem isn't specific to any one application.


Printer troubleshooting tips
Troubleshooting
Printer troubleshooting tips

When trying to resolve problems with printing from PhotoDeluxe Business, consider the following:

•  Ensure you are using the latest printer driver designed specifically for your operating system. A printer driver is software that your computer needs for printing. Printer manufacturers frequently update their printer drivers, so you should never assume that the drivers supplied with your printer are the latest version or were designed specifically for your operating system version. Contact your printer manufacturer for the latest driver.

•  Try printing from another application, such as the Windows Paint accessory. If Microsoft Paint will not print to your printer, contact your printer manufacturer or Microsoft for further assistance.

•  Many printers cannot use the entire sheet of paper when printing, so be sure that your image size in PhotoDeluxe Business is within the printable area of your printed page. To see how much of the page your photo occupies, use the Print Preview feature. To find out the printable area for your printer, refer to your printer manual.

•  If your scanned images print with a plaid pattern, or with colored or gray blotches, ensure that you are scanning original artwork. Previously printed material (for example, a picture from a magazine, book, brochure, newsletter, or poster) has already been broken up into a halftone pattern for reproduction. Because scanners convert light and dark areas into a dot pattern, or halftone, creating a dot pattern of areas that are already dot patterns produces what is called a moire pattern—a screen, or plaid pattern, or colored or gray blotches.


Screen display problems
Troubleshooting
Screen display problems

If your screen display looks distorted, the colors look wrong, or screen elements are blacked out, consider the following:

•  Ensure you are using the latest video card driver designed specifically for your video hardware and operating system. A video card driver is software that your computer needs for screen display. Video card manufacturers frequently update their drivers, so you should never assume that the drivers supplied with your computer are the latest version or were designed specifically for your operating system version. Contact your video card manufacturer for the latest driver, or download the driver from the manufacturer's Web page, if available.

•   When some computers are manufactured, they are set to 256 colors. In general, you will have better luck working on photos if you set your Windows color palette setting to High Color (16 bit) or higher (such as 24 or 32 bit) so that you can see all the colors in your photos.

To change the system color palette:

1  Click the Windows Start button, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Display icon.

2  Click the Settings tab.

3  Under Color Palette (Windows 95) or Color (Windows 98), select High Color (16 bit) or higher, and then click OK.

If your Desktop Area (Windows 95) or Screen Area (Windows 98) changes so that icons and windows are too large, try a different color palette setting.


A painting or editing tool doesn't seem to work
Troubleshooting
A painting or editing tool doesn't seem to work

Tools work on the selected layer and within any active selections on the layer. Make sure that the layer you want to edit is active (appears highlighted) in the Layers palette. To make a layer active, click its name in the Layers palette. For details, see Editing a layered picture.


A selected area is empty
Troubleshooting
A selected area is empty

If a message appears stating that an operation, such as deletion of a selection, could not be completed because the selected area is empty, make sure that the layer with the selection you want to edit is active (appears highlighted) in the Layers palette. For details, see Editing a layered picture.


Problems opening files
Troubleshooting
Problems opening files

PhotoDeluxe can open a wide variety of file formats.

If you are having problems opening templates, guided activities, or sample photos, uninstall PhotoDeluxe Business. (Click the Start menu, choose Programs, choose Adobe, choose PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0, choose Uninstall PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0.) Then reinstall the software.

Use these guidelines when choosing files to open in PhotoDeluxe:

•  BMP files—Avoid Macintosh bitmaps; use Windows bitmaps instead.

•  CompuServe GIF files—Avoid animated GIFs; use GIFs that are saved with a 256-color palette.

•  PICT files—Avoid PICT files with JPEG compression and PICTR (PICT Resource) files.

See also:

Uninstalling PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0


Uninstalling PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0
Troubleshooting
Uninstalling PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0

If you are having problems opening templates, guided activities, or sample photos, you may want to uninstall PhotoDeluxe Business, and then reinstall it.

Note: You can open graphic files in PhotoDeluxe Business by double-clicking them in Windows Explorer or My Computer. If you don't plan to reinstall PhotoDeluxe Business, after you uninstall you won't be able to open files this way. If you want to be able to double-click files and have them open in a different graphics program, you need to associate those files with another program. For details, see your Windows documentation.

To uninstall PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0:

1  Click the Windows Start button, choose Settings, and then choose Control Panel.

2  Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

3  Select Adobe PhotoDeluxe Business Edition 1.0, and then click Add/Remove.


Troubleshooting when resizing a photo
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting when resizing a photo

Resizing a photo can be tricky. The following ideas can help you avoid mistakes:

•  For best results, change photo size just once per image after deciding on the final photo size in advance. Changing the size of the same photo repeatedly will degrade the image quality of the photo. If you want to experiment with various sizes, save the image, and try out the sizes you want to see, without saving changes. Then choose File > Revert to Last Saved to return to the original. Now you can make your final photo size change.

•  A photo enlarged more than approximately 200 percent may lose sharpness, use more disk space, and take longer to print without any increase in quality, because you can't add more detail than exists in the digital photo. If you want to enlarge a photo that much, you may want to get another version of the digital photo at a higher resolution (for example, by scanning it again).

See also:

Image resolution

Changing the size of a photo


Troubleshooting fonts in templates
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting fonts in templates

Your PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM includes Adobe Type Manager (ATM) software and Adobe fonts, which are required for templates to work properly.

During installation, if ATM Deluxe was already installed on your computer, PhotoDeluxe Business displayed a message warning you not to install the standard ATM version over your ATM Deluxe version. Instead, you will have to install the Adobe fonts separately using the Custom installation option.

To install the Adobe fonts:

1  Using Windows Explorer or My Computer, open the Install folder on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM, and then double-click Setup.exe.

2  Select the Custom installation option, and then click Next.

3  Deselect all options, select Adobe Fonts, and then follow the instructions on-screen.

4  Using ATM Deluxe, install the fonts located in the AdobeFonts folder inside folder where you installed PhotoDeluxe Business.


Definitions

See also:

bitmap

format

gallery

noise

pixel

plug-in

resolution

scratch disk

template

thumbnail

TWAIN


format

Software companies have different ways to store pictures and other files electronically. These different methods are known as formats. PhotoDeluxe Business can open files that have been stored in a wide variety of formats:

•  PhotoDeluxe Business (*.pdd, *.pbd) •  PhotoShop (*.psd) •  Adobe Acrobat (*.pdf) •  BMP (*.bmp, *.rle) •  CompuServe GIF (*.gif) •  EPS (*.eps) •  Generic EPS (*.ai, *.ai3, *.ai4, *.ai5, *.ai6, *.ai7) •  EPS TIFF Preview (*.eps)	•  FlashPix (*.fpx) •  JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpe) •  Kodak Photo CD (*.pcd) •  PCX (*.pcx) •  PICT File (*.pict) •  PNG (*.png) •  Targa (*.tga, *.vda, *.icb, *.vst) •  TIFF (*.tif) •  Windows Metafile (*.wmf)
PhotoDeluxe Business can also save (export) pictures in a number of different formats.

See also:

Problems opening files


resolution

Image resolution refers to the number of pixels (tiny blocks of color or gray shades that make up a picture) available to represent detail in a given area. A photo with more pixels per inch is said to have a higher resolution than a photo with fewer pixels per inch. Higher resolutions allow for more detail and subtle color transitions in an image, but they also mean bigger file sizes.


bitmap

A bitmap is a picture made up of numerous individual pixels (picture elements), like tiles in a mosaic or pieces in a jigsaw puzzle. All photos you see in PhotoDeluxe Business are bitmaps.


gallery

A gallery is a collection of photos. Gallery names appear on tabs in an organizer window, such as My Photos, Clip Art, and Samples. Each photo in the gallery appears as a thumbnail (miniature) image of the original photo. You can retrieve photos from galleries to edit in PhotoDeluxe Business or paste in other documents. In the My Photos window, you can add photos to galleries.


template

Template files are prebuilt designs for projects (business cards, calendars, letterhead stationery, coupons, flyers, Web graphics, and so on) that you create in the guided activities. To start a guided activity, click the Projects button, and then follow the instructions on-screen.


thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature representation of a photo.


TWAIN

TWAIN refers to software technology (provided by your device's manufacturer) that allows different types of devices, such as scanners and digital cameras, to communicate with PhotoDeluxe Business.


plug-in

A plug-in module is software that extends the functionality of PhotoDeluxe Business. For example, some plug-ins provide access to file formats or add special effects to the Effects menu.


pixel

An abbreviation for picture element, a pixel is one of the square blocks of color (including black, white, and gray shades in monochrome pictures) that make up a digital photo. The pixels in a photo are laid out in a grid, or raster, like tiles in a mosaic.


noise

Noise refers to pixels with randomly distributed color levels. You can use the Effects > Blur or Effects > Noise > Despeckle commands to reduce noise. In some cases, you may want to use the Effects > Noise command to add noise in order to make a noise-free area blend into a noisy area.


scratch disk

The scratch disk is a section of available space on your hard disk that PhotoDeluxe Business uses for photo-editing tasks if it runs out of RAM. For example, if you have 16 MB of RAM allocated to PhotoDeluxe Business, and you are opening a 5 MB photo, PhotoDeluxe Business will need 15–25 MB of RAM. To make up the difference, PhotoDeluxe Business will temporarily use memory from your scratch disk while the photo is opening.


Choosing a layout for your calendar

The Choose button lets you choose a layout for a project that requires photos. Layout refers to the arrangement of photo, text, and decorations in your project. Before adding the photo to your project, make sure the photo looks the way you want. If you need to adjust the quality of the photo first, click the Get & Fix button, click the Touch Up or Repair tab, and use one or more activities to improve your photo.

Because the layout templates are stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD, you need to have the PhotoDeluxe Business CD in your CD-ROM drive when you choose a layout. The layout choices appear as thumbnails in a gallery. Find the thumbnail that represents the layout you want, and then drag the thumbnail to the work area to open the template. For more information on galleries, see About the photo organizer.

See also:

Using templates


Choosing a style for your calendar

Style refers to the type of design used in your calendar. The placement of the photo, text, and decorations is dictated by the layout.

Because the style templates are stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD, you need to have the PhotoDeluxe Business CD in your CD-ROM drive when you choose a style. The style choices appear as thumbnails in a gallery. Find the thumbnail that represents the style you want, and then drag the thumbnail onto your photo. For more information on galleries, see About the photo organizer.

See also:

Using templates


Color Balance

Drag the triangles or type values in the dialog box to do the following:

•  Improve a less-than perfect photograph by adding or removing color tints.

•  Create interesting visual effects.

•  Add a color tint to a black-and-white photograph.

•  Compensate for the output from your color printer.

The Color Balance feature applies to the entire photograph unless you first select an area within the photograph. Different parts of the picture can have different Color Balance settings.

Make sure the Preview option is checked. That way you can instantly see how the changes you make alter your photo. For more help, see Making a selection.


Drop Shadow

You can add a shadow to any selected portion of a photo. The options in the Drop Shadow dialog box control the direction the shadow falls, how far it extends from the selected area in the photo, and the color and opacity of the shadow.

The Opacity setting determines how transparent the shadow should be. Rarely is a shadow so dark that you can't see the colors of the surfaces it falls across, so you'll usually keep the value well under 100%.


Export formats

Typically the destination of your photo determines the export file format to select. If you want to bring the photo into other software, for example, find out what formats that software can open or import. If you are planning to display the photo on the World Wide Web, then GIF and JPEG are the best formats to choose.

JPEG: This option lets you save in JPEG format, which compresses photos, reducing file size for fast and efficient downloading over the Internet. JPEG compression also retains excellent image quality, although there is always some loss of information with this kind of compression. For more information, see JPEG format.

FlashPix: This option lets you save in the FlashPix (.FPX) file format. This format, developed by Kodak, is designed to speed the transfer and display of large, high-resolution files in applications that support the FlashPix technology. For more information, see FlashPix format.

GIF: This option lets you save in a 256-color format that is widely used for small pictures on the World Wide Web. It is especially useful if you want your photo to have transparent areas so that your Web page background can show through. For more information, see GIF format and GIF format advanced options.

Acrobat PDF: This option lets anyone with Adobe Acrobat Reader (distributed free of charge) view and print your photo or project exactly as you designed it—complete with the same fonts, colors, and other visual effects. For more information, see Creating an Adobe Acrobat file.

Index Color: This option saves in 256-color bitmap format which is accepted by a wide-variety of applications. You can control the way PhotoDeluxe Business stores the colors with the photo in the Index Color dialog box. For more information, see Index color file.

Gray Scale: This options saves a photo with shades of gray replacing any color in the file. You can choose from several image formats, such as EPS, TIFF, Photoshop, and GIF. For more information, see Grayscale file.

Other Formats: This option lets you choose from several popular image formats, such as EPS, TIFF, and Photoshop. For more information on these formats, see Choosing a file format.


GIF format

The Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) is widely used on Web pages because the format minimizes file size by using a limited color palette (up to 256 colors). Keeping files small ensures fast and efficient downloading over the Internet.

You can use an HTML editor such as Adobe PageMill to add additional effects to GIF images. To do this, click the Send & Save button, click the To Application tab, and then click the PageMill button. Follow the instructions on-screen.

 If you click Advanced in the dialog box that appears after you click GIF Format, you can make portions of the photo transparent, control how colors are stored in the GIF file, and use other special settings that affect the look and the file size of the photo. For more information, see GIF format.


JPEG format

JPEG format compresses photos, reducing file size for fast and efficient downloading over the Internet. JPEG compression also retains excellent image quality, although there is always some loss of information with this kind of compression. For more information, see Preparing a photo for online display.

 After you've named the file and clicked Save, if you click Advanced in the dialog box that appears, you can set the level of compression and the level of photo quality you want to retain. (The greater the compression, the greater the image degradation.) For more information, see Saving in JPEG format.


Choosing a layout for your card

The Choose button lets you choose a layout for a project that requires photos. Layout refers to the arrangement of photo, text, and decorations in your project. Before adding the photo to your project, make sure the photo looks the way you want. If you need to adjust the quality of the photo first, click the Get & Fix button, click the Touch Up or Repair tab, and use one or more activities to improve your photo.

Because the layout templates are stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD, you need to have the PhotoDeluxe Business CD in your CD-ROM drive when you choose a layout. The layout choices appear as thumbnails in a gallery. Find the thumbnail that represents the layout you want, and then drag the thumbnail to the work area to open the template. For more information on galleries, see About the photo organizer.

See also:

Using templates


Choosing a style for your card

Style refers to the type of design used in your card. The placement of the photo, text, and decorations is dictated by the layout.

Because the style templates are stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD, you need to have the PhotoDeluxe Business CD in your CD-ROM drive when you choose a style. The style choices appear as thumbnails in a gallery. Find the thumbnail that represents the style you want, and then drag the thumbnail onto your photo. For more information on galleries, see About the photo organizer.

See also:

Using templates


Hue/Saturation settings

You can use this feature to correct a photo or a selected area of a photo that is less than perfect, to add even color to a black-and-white picture, or simply to apply interesting effects to all or part of a photo.

By dragging arrows (or typing values) in the dialog box, you can change the following aspects of the photo or selected area:

Hue: Moving the arrow left or right of center passes the photo or selected area through the spectrum of color available.

Saturation: Moving the arrow to the left of center creates a duller tint. Moving to the right creates a more vibrant tint.

Lightness: Moving the arrow to the left darkens the tint. Moving to the right increases the brightness.

 Changes to lightness can often make changes to contrast necessary. (Contrast is the range between light and dark areas in the photo.) So consider using the Brightness/Contrast feature (Quality > Brightness/Contrast) rather than Hue/Saturation if you really want to improve this aspect of your photo.


Extensis IntelliFix

The Extensis IntelliFix feature automatically improves your photo's (or a selected area's) contrast, brightness, color saturation, and sharpness. The result is a broader range of colors, and a crisper image overall.

 If you have a dark or black background, you may want to trim some of the background off before using this feature. For more information, see Trimming a photo.

This feature can also alter colors, so be sure to compare the photo before and after applying Extensis IntelliFix. Use Undo if the color changes aren't satisfactory to you.


Perspective

With the Perspective feature, you can change the angle from which a photo appears to have been taken, or make a selected area within the photo appear to recede into or emerge out of the distance. (In this guided activity, you change the whole photo rather than a selected area within it.)

When you click Perspective, a box appears around the photo with selection handles on each side and corner. How you work with the handles depends on whether you want to change the "camera angle" up or down, or from side to side.

•  Move a corner handle horizontally to make the photo or selected area appear as if viewed from a higher or lower vantage point; the handle to the left or right will move in the opposite direction.

•  Move a corner handle vertically to make the photo or selected area appear as if viewed from a closer or wider horizontal angle; the handle above or below it will move in the opposite direction.

•  Move the top or bottom center handles to move the sides while keeping them parallel. Move the left or right center handles to move the top and bottom while keeping them parallel.

When you release the mouse button, the screen redraws with the new perspective. Continue to move handles until the effect is as you want it, and then click OK. For more information, see Creating perspective.

 Clicking inside the box has the same effect as clicking OK.


Choosing a layout for your photo album

The Choose Page button lets you choose an album layout. Layout refers to the arrangement of photo, text, and decorations in your project. Before adding the photo to your project, make sure the photo looks the way you want. If you need to adjust the quality of the photo first, click the Get & Fix button, click the Touch Up or Repair tab, and use one or more activities to improve your photo.

Because the layout templates are stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD, you need to have the PhotoDeluxe Business CD in your CD-ROM drive when you choose a layout. The layout choices appear as thumbnails in a gallery. Find the thumbnail that represents the layout you want, and then drag the thumbnail to the work area to open the template. For more information on galleries, see About the photo organizer.

See also:

Using templates


Choosing a layout for your project

The Choose button lets you choose a layout for a project that requires one or more photos. Layout refers to the arrangement of the photo, text, and decorations in your project. Before adding the photo to your project, make sure the photo looks the way you want. If you need to adjust the quality of the photo first, click the Get & Fix Photo button, click the Touch Up or Repair tab, and use one or more of the activities to improve your photo.

Because the layout templates are stored on the PhotoDeluxe Business CD, you need to have the PhotoDeluxe Business CD in your CD-ROM drive when you choose a layout. The layout choices appear as thumbnails in a gallery. Find the thumbnail that represents the layout you want, and then drag the thumbnail to the work area to open the template. For more information on galleries, see About the photo organizer.

See also:

Using templates


Posterizing

To create an interesting visual effect, you can change the number of colors included in the photo (or in the selected area of the photo). Reducing the number of colors creates flat areas of color where once there was a finer gradation between colors.

You control the posterizing effect by changing the Levels value in the Posterize dialog box. To restore the range of colors or levels of gray the photo had when you first opened it in PhotoDeluxe Business, type 255 in the Posterize dialog box. To apply the most severe posterization, type 2. For more information, see Posterize.

 Make sure the Preview option is selected in the Posterize dialog box. That way you can instantly see the effect of the new values you type in the Levels field.


Cloning to repair, restore, and retouch a photo

The Clone tool lets you copy an area of your photo by dragging. In effect you paint with a copy of the photo instead of with a single color. This is useful for "painting over" scratches, rips, or any unsightly aspect of the photo. For example, if a shirt in the photo revealed a stain, you could clone a clean part of the shirt, replacing the stain.

With the Clone tool selected, drag the source point and move it to the area of the photo you want to copy. You can select the brush size you want from the Clone palette. Position the pointer on the photo and drag to paint a copy.

As you paint, the brush begins copying from the source point. If you release the mouse button and start dragging again, the brush starts copying from the source point again. To make a perfect duplicate of an area, don't release the mouse button until you're finished making the copy.

For information on other ways to duplicate, see Duplicating an area.


Reducing resolution

Because most computer monitors commonly display between 72 and 96 pixels per inch (ppi), a resolution much greater than that is usually unnecessary and slows down the transmission and downloading of the photo over the Internet. For printing, you need a much higher resolution for high-quality output. (Most desktop printers rated at 300 to 600 dots per inch (dpi) need photos with a resolution between 100 and 170 ppi.) For more information, see Changing the size of a photo.


Selection fill

With this feature, you can fill a selection with a color or pattern.


Selection Fill and Gradient Fill

You can click Selection Fill or Gradient Fill to define the silhouette effect. Both the Selection Fill and Gradient Fill options let you apply the effect to the photo's background or to the selected area.

If you select Selection Fill you can do the following:

•  Choose a color or a pattern to fill the selected area or the background behind the selected area.

•  Specify the opacity, which determines how transparent the fill or pattern appears. (Type 100% if you want a solid silhouette, one that completely covers the colors in the selected area.)

•  Specify the blending method, or indicate how you want to combine the fill or pattern with the colors underneath it. For more details, see Selecting a blending mode.

If you select Gradient Fill, you can do the following:

•  Select two colors to blend together in the selected area.

•  Specify the direction in which the two colors blend together—for example, from top to bottom of the photo or from the center out to the edge.

To learn about options in the Selection Fill dialog box, see Filling a selection. To find out more about the Gradient Fill dialog box, see Creating a gradient fill.


Changing Size

You change the size of the photo by typing a new height or width in the Photo Size dialog box. Changing one dimension automatically changes the other dimension so that the photo doesn't get stretched out of proportion.

To find out how to stretch a photo without preserving proportions, see Distorting a photo. To find out how to reduce the resolution or the file size of the photo, see Changing the size of a photo.


SmartSelect tool

Use the SmartSelect tool when you need to select areas of uniform color that are hard to trace with the Polygon tool—for example, when you need to select a face without selecting the hair around the face.

Simply click once on a starting point and guide the pointer along the rough border of the area you want to select. The SmartSelect tool does the detailed work of creating the selection shape. You can also click as you drag to force the tool to continue in the direction you want to go. For example, if the face you are selecting is partly in shadow, you'd click where the shadow falls so that the tool can continue selecting the face as it appears with shadow across it. To end the selection process, go back to the first point you clicked to begin selecting: The pointer becomes an OK symbol. Click to complete the selection shape.

 You can also double-click or hold down the Ctrl key and click to complete a selection. To clear the selection and start over, press Esc.

If the SmartSelect Options palette is available, you can set options for the tool to change Brush Width, set its Sensitivity—that is, specify how sensitive the tool is to color differences—and set its Feather, which smoothes out the selection based on the number of pixels you select. If you want to select a red face surrounded by red hair, you need to specify a low Sensitivity value so that the tool can detect the fine difference between the hair color and the skin tone. For more information, see Using the SmartSelect tool and SmartSelect Options palette settings.


Softening

Softening is a way to blend an object or selection with its background. In this activity, you increase realism by softening the drop shadow.

In the Soften dialog box, you can click the + or – buttons to zoom in or out on the preview image. To change which part of the photo appears in the preview window, position the pointer within the window—it becomes the Hand tool—and then drag.

Moving the arrow on the Radius setting to the right increases the amount of softening. If the Preview option is selected, the photo takes time after you drag the arrow to a new point; the preview window offers a more immediate view of the new softening setting.

 You can soften all or part of a photo. Softening the background of a photo, for example, can help the subject in the foreground stand out, as if the photo were taken with a different focus setting.


Text

Type text in the font and color you want. When you click OK, your text will appear as a text object, which you can then move, rotate, or resize. To edit or reformat the text after you've created it, simply double-click the text in the photo window to reopen the Text Tool dialog box.

You cannot specify more than one font or color per text object, but you can have several different text objects in a document. All text objects reside on the same layer, which appears by default on top of the stack of layers in your document.


Variations

The Variations feature lets you quickly see the results of adding different colors to your original image. The original is shown side by side with the modified version so that you can compare the results and pick the one that suits your needs. For more information, see Using Variations.


Wind effect

You can use this feature to add a look of motion, or to create a windblown effect (as if your photo were made of colored sand and then blown by the wind). The enhancement can apply to all of the photo or to a selected area within the photo.

In the Wind dialog box you can set the direction of the wind and the wind effect, and click OK.

Use the preview window to see the effect of your changes. To preview a different portion of your photo, drag within the preview window. To zoom in or zoom out on the preview, click the + or – buttons below the preview window. For more information, see Wind.


Scan Mode (Custom or Guided)
Scan Mode

You can have PhotoDeluxe Business guide you through scanning your image or you can use your own software:

•  Guided—PhotoDeluxe Business guides you through scanning a photo and automatically sets up your scanner depending on the type of photo you are scanning.

•  Custom—You can scan the photo on your own using the scanner manufacturer's software to control the scanning process. If you don't have a flatbed scanner, use this method.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras


Scan Output

The Output feature sets the resolution of the scan.

•  If the image will be used in a printed document, click Printed Document. PhotoDeluxe sets the scan to have a higher-resolution.

•  If the image will be used only online, click Web Page. PhotoDeluxe sets the scan to use a lower-resolution.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras


Scan Sizing

The Sizing feature sets how large to make the image. You don't have to know the exact size you want—just use your best guess.

•  If you plan to use the image as is or smaller than it is now, click Original 100%.

•  If you want the image larger than it is now, click Larger 150% or 200% or more.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras


Scan Type

The Type feature sets what type of photo you're scanning.

•  If you are scanning a color photograph, click Color Photo.

•  If you are scanning a black and white photo or newspaper photo, click B&W Photo.

•  If you are scanning a drawing that has a lot of lines, a chart, or other line art, click Line Art.

•  If you are scanning text, click Text.

See also:

About scanners and digital cameras


Remove Moire Pattern

The Remove Moire Pattern effect removes moire patterns (diagonal stripes) that are superimposed on an image. You'll find moire patterns most often in scanned images.

Original	Remove Moire Pattern

 If you are not sure if Remove Moire Pattern is right for your problem, click Example in the Remove Moire Pattern dialog box to see a before and after example. (Note: The Example button appears only when your system is set to 16-bit or 24-bit color.)

See also:

Applying Remove Moire Pattern


Dust & Scratches

Dust & Scratches reduces noise in an image by searching a photo or selection for color differences to remove or alter. For more information about Dust & Scratches, see Reducing the impact of dust and scratches.

Original	Dust & Scratches

See also:

Reducing the impact of dust and scratches


Change color

You can use the Color Picker to set the foreground and background colors used with this effect.

To set the foreground and background colors:

1  Position the pointer over the color area. Click the color you want to set as the foreground color. To select a color from an open photo, click the color in the photo window. For information, see Using the Color Picker.

2  Click the Background color swatch to make it active. A black outline surrounds the swatch.

3  Position the pointer over the color area. Click the color you want to set as the background color. To select a color from an open photo, click the color in the photo window.

4  Click OK.


Change Opacity

You can make all or part of your photo transparent so that you can use it as a background or so that text you add in front of the photo can be easily read.

•  The Name setting controls the name of the layer—you don't have to name the layer.

•  The Opacity setting controls how see through the layer is. Try 30% and see if the photo fades away enough to make a good background. For more information, see Blending layers.

•  The Blend option controls how photos on different layers blend in a multilayered document. For more information, see Creating a layered picture and Selecting a blending mode.


Index color

An index color photo is one that has at most 256 colors. When you convert an image to index color, PhotoDeluxe Business deletes all but 256 colors. The program converts the remaining colors to the nearest match or simulates the colors using tiny spots of the available colors.

The name "index color" refers to the fact that color information is stored as an index to each color's location in a table of colors—as if to say "color 21 goes here, color 97 goes here," and so forth.

Index color mode is useful when you want to limit the number of colors used in a photo—for example, when you want to use it on a Web page. Index color lets you reduce the file size of a photo while maintaining the visual quality that you need.

See also:

Index Color File

Manipulating the color table of an index color photo


Feather effect

The effect of feathering fades the edges of the selection, creating a gradual transition from the selection to the surrounding area. When you define a feather edge, you can choose to fill the background or the selection, or delete the background or the selection.

Original

5 pixels	10 pixels

The "For Feather Edge of the Selection" setting controls how far PhotoDeluxe fades the edges of the selection. You can enter from 1 to 250 pixels.

The Fill Color setting controls the color used to fade the edges. To set the color you want to use, click the Fill Color swatch and select a color using the Color Picker. To select a color from the photo, click the color in the photo window while the Color Picker palette is open. Then click OK. For more help, see Using the Color Picker.

The Action setting controls whether you want to keep the selection or the background:

•  To delete the selection and fade the edges outside the selection, click Delete Selection.

•  To keep the selection, delete the background, and fade the edges of the selection, click Delete Background.

•  To fill the selection with the foreground color and fade the edges, click Fill Selection.

•  To fill the background with the foreground color and fade the edges, click Fill Background.

See also:

Feathering a selection


Stitch Panorama

If you've taken a series of pictures, you can have them stitched together to create a long or tall panorama photo. Before you click Stitch, make sure your photos are arranged and sized the way you want them:

•  For horizontal panoramas, make sure your pictures are in the left to right order that you want and that they are all the same height.

•  For vertical panoramas, make sure your pictures are in the top to bottom order that you want and that they are all the same width.

 If you've changed the sizes, but your pictures don't look like they're the same size, make sure each picture is set to the same zoom percentage.

The Stitch feature puts your photos together side by side, matching up color areas. After PhotoDeluxe Business creates your panorama, if you like it, click OK. You may find that PhotoDeluxe Business had to move one of your photos up, down, to the left, or to the right to make it line up with the other photos. If that's the case, simply trim off the excess in the next step.

Note: You can have up to three photos in your panorama. To add more photos, install the Infinite Pictures full version. Check the PhotoDeluxe Business CD-ROM (in the Extras folder) or contact Infinite Pictures at the following Web site or fax number:

•  http://www.smoothmove.com/adobe.html

•  Fax: (503) 221-2449

See also:

Tips for taking pictures to use in a panorama


Tips for taking pictures to use in a panorama

When you take pictures that you want to turn into a panorama, try these tips to get the best possible results.

•  If your camera has it, turn off automatic lighting adjustment. You want all photos to have the same lighting.

•  Use the same speed and aperture setting. Your photos may be darker or lighter than ideal, but they will blend better.

•  Use a tripod to make the camera completely level. It's difficult to take each picture at the exact same height without the assistance of a tripod.

•  Take the first picture, then move the camera slightly more than half of a frame to take the next photo, overlapping the previous one by almost 50%. The panorama feature will detect where your pictures are the same and stitch them together.

•  Take pictures of people before they move too much. Anything moving in the photos (such as people, cars, ocean waves, and so on) will become a shadowy blur in the panorama, because images are averaged from one to the next.

•  If you change the photos before creating the panorama, make the same changes to all photos. The more the color balance, saturation, and contrast remain the same from photo to photo, the better they will look when assembled in a panorama.


Defining a pattern

You can use the Define Pattern feature to set what pattern you will apply to a selected area of a photo or to a selected layer of a photo. Then, you can use the Selection Fill feature to fill that area or layer with the pattern. For more information, see Filling a selection.


Print Multiple

Click Print Multiple to set how many copies of your document you want to print on each page.

•  The Copies Across setting controls how many columns of your document are printed. If you're using special paper, make sure this number matches the number of columns you can print on your paper.

•  The Copies Down setting controls how many rows of your document are printed. If you're using special paper, make sure this number matches the number of rows you can print on your paper.

•  The Paper Type setting controls the type of paper you are printing on.

Note: For some PhotoDeluxe Business templates, a specific Avery paper stock is chosen by default. This is the paper stock that the template is designed for. To choose another paper, click Change. For complete information on Avery paper, see Avery paper stock.

•  The Print button displays the Print dialog box, where you can print your document.

See also:

Printing a photo

Using templates


Avery paper stock

PhotoDeluxe Business templates are specifically designed to work with Avery paper stock. For example, if you create a business card, you can set PhotoDeluxe to use Avery business card paper, and then print multiple copies of your business card on a page.

To print multiple copies of your document on a page:

1  Click the Send & Save button, click the To Printer tab, and then click the Multiple on a Page button.

2  On the 1 Type tab, click Choose Type, and then click the paper you want.

PhotoDeluxe Business automatically resizes your photo to fit the new paper.

Note: For some PhotoDeluxe Business templates, a specific Avery paper stock is chosen by default. This is the paper stock that the template is designed for. To choose another paper, click Change. For complete information on Avery paper, see Avery paper stock.

See also:

U.S. Avery paper stock

International Avery paper stock


U.S. Avery paper stock

Guided Activity	Avery Description	Size	Avery Number (also called SKU)
Business Cards (Projects > Cards > Business Cards)	Ink Jet Business Card	2.00" x 3.50"	8371
	Laser Business Card	2.00" x 3.50"	5371
	Laser Business Card	2.00" x 3.50"	5372
	Photo Quality Business Card	2.00" x 3.50"	8373
	Laminated Rotary Index Card	2.06" x 3.88"	5364
	Rotary Card - Large	3.00" x 5.00"	5386
	Rotary Card - Small	2.17" x 4.00"	5385
	Avery Kids Biz Cards	2.00" x 3.50"	3612
	White Mini Folded Card	2.00" x 3.5"	3264
Calendars (Projects > Cards > Calendars)	Full-Size Card Sheet	11.00" x 8.50"	3267
Coupons (Projects > Promote > Coupons)	Laminated ID Card	2.00" x 3.25"	5361
	Index Card	3.00" x 5.00"	5388
	See also: Business Cards	—	—
Direct Mail Cards (Projects > Promote > Direct Mail Cards)	Post Card	4.00" x 6.00"	5389
	Ink Jet Post Card	4.25" x 5.50"	8387
	Photo Quality Post Card	4.00" x 6.00"	8389
	Avery Kids Postcards	4.00" x 6.00"	3611
	White Post Card (landscape)	4.25" x 5.50"	3263
	Self-Seal Mailer	3.69" x 8.50"	8325
	Self-Seal Mailer - Blue	3.69" x 8.50"	8426
Flyers	Self-Seal Mailer	3.69" x 8.50"	8325
	Self-Seal Mailer - Blue	3.69" x 8.50"	8426
Holiday Cards— See Invitations	—	—	—
In-Store Display	Tent Card Large	6.25" x 10.25"	5309
	Tent Card Med.	4.25" x 7.75"	5305
	White Mini Folded Card	2.00" x 3.5"	3264
Invitations (Projects > Cards > Invitations)	Ink Jet Greeting Card	5.50" x 8.50"	8316
	Ink Jet Note Card	5.50" x 4.25"	8315
	Laser Note Card	5.50" x 4.25"	5315
	White Note Card	5.50" x 4.25"	3268
	White Half-Fold Glossy Card	5.50" x 8.50"	3269
	Half-Fold Card	5.50" x 8.50"	3265
	Quarter-Fold Card	5.50" x 4.25"	3266
	Post Card	4.00" x 6.00"	5389
	Ink Jet Post Card	4.25" x 5.50"	8387
Labels (Projects > Forms > Labels)	Address	1.00" x 2.63"	5160
	Address	1.00" x 4.00"	5161
	Address	1.33" x 4.00"	5162
	Address	1.00" x 2.63"	5260
	Address	1.00" x 4.00"	5261
	Address	1.33" x 4.00"	5262
	Address	1.00" x 2.63"	5960
	Address	1.00" x 4.00"	5961
	Address	1.33" x 4.00"	5962
	Ink Jet Address	1.00" x 2.63"	8160
	Ink Jet Address	1.00" x 4.00"	8161
	Ink Jet Address	1.33" x 4.00"	8162
	Ink Jet Address	1.00" x 2.63"	8460
	Ink Jet Address	1.33" x 4.00"	8462
	Ink Jet Clear Address	1.00" x 2.63"	8660
	Ink Jet Clear Address	1.33" x 4.00"	8662
	Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	5163
	Address / Shipping	3.33" x 4.00"	5164
	Address / Shipping	5.00" x 3.50"	5168
	Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	5263
	Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	5963
	Glossy Photo Quality Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	8261
	Ink Jet Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	8163
	Ink Jet Address / Shipping	3.33" x 4.00"	8164
	Ink Jet Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	8463
	Ink Jet Clear Address / Shipping	2.00" x 4.00"	8663
	Remove 'Em - 30 labels per page	1.00" x 2.63"	6460
	3 1/2" Diskette - White	2.75" x 2.75"	5996
	3 1/2" Diskette - White	2.75" x 2.75"	5196
	Ink Jet 3 1/2" Diskette	2.75" x 2.75"	8196
	Audio Cassette	1.67" x 3.50"	5198
	Audio Cassette	1.67" x 3.50"	5998
	Videotape Face	1.83" x 3.06"	5199
	Videotape Face	1.83" x 3.06"	5997
	CD-Recordable Labels	4.50" x 4.50"	5824
	Glossy Photo Quality Labels	1.25" x 3.75"	8260
	Ink Jet Label for Color Printers	1.00" x 2.63"	8250
	Ink Jet Label for Color Printers	2.00" x 4.00"	8253
	Remove 'Em diskette-face only labels	2.00" x 2.69"	6490
	White Large Labels	1.25" x 3.75"	3261
Name Tags (Projects > Forms > Labels)	Laminated Name Badge	2.00" x 3.25"	5362
	Name Badge - White	2.33" x 3.38"	5395
	Name Tag Kit	2.17" x 3.50"	5383
	Name Tag Kit	3.00" x 4.00"	5384
	Name Tag Kit	2.17" x 3.50"	CB7-0C
	Name Tag Kit	2.17" x 3.50"	5383
Tickets (Projects > Cards > Tickets)	Index Card	3.00" x 5.00"	5388
	Laminated ID Card	2.00" x 3.25"	5361
	See also: Business Cards	—	—


International Avery paper stock

Guided Activity	Avery Description	Size	Avery Number (also called SKU)
Business Cards (Projects > Cards > Business Cards)	Biz Card	50.80 mm x 80.37 mm	C2354
	Business Card	50.80 mm x 87.00 mm	J8414
	Business Card	50.80 mm x 90.00 mm	L7413
Compliment Slips (Projects > Forms > Compliment Slips)	Compliment Slip	93.00 mm x 210.00 mm	L7905
Coupons (Projects > Promote > Coupons)	See  Business Cards
		—	—
Direct Mail Cards (Projects > Promote > Direct Mail Cards)	Post Card	110.40 mm x 146.50 mm	C2353
	Post Card	97.29 mm x 139.37 mm	L7421
Holiday Cards— See Invitations	—	—	—
Invitations (Projects > Cards > Invitations)	Greeting Cards A5	297.00 mm x 210.00 mm	C2351
	Greeting Cards A6	297.00 mm x 210.00 mm	C2352
	Note card	120.72 mm x 165.10 mm	C2355
	Post Card	110.40 mm x 146.50 mm	C2353
	Post Card	97.29 mm x 139.37 mm	L7421
Labels (Projects > Forms > Labels)	Address	38.10 mm x 63.50 mm	J8160
	Address	33.87 mm x 99.06 mm	J8162
	Address	38.10 mm x 99.06 mm	J8163
	Address	38.10 mm x 63.50 mm	J8360
	Address	33.87 mm x 99.06 mm	J8362
	Address	38.10 mm x 99.06 mm	J8363
	Address	38.10 mm x 63.50 mm	L7160
	Address	33.87 mm x 99.06 mm	L7162
	Address	38.10 mm x 99.06 mm	L7163
	Clear Address	38.10 mm x 63.50 mm	J8560
	Clear Address	33.87 mm x 99.06 mm	J8562
	Clear Address	38.10 mm x 99.06 mm	J8563
	Mailing Label	38.10 mm x 63.50 mm	C2160
	Mailing Label	38.10 mm x 99.06 mm	C2163
	Parcel	67.73 mm x 99.06 mm	J8165
	Parcel	67.73 mm x 99.06 mm	L7165
	Clear Parcel	67.73 mm x 99.06 mm	J8565
	3 1/2" Diskette - Face Only	52.00 mm x 70.00 mm	L7666
	3 1/2" Diskette - Face only	52.00 mm x 70.00 mm	C2166
	3 1/2" Diskette - Face Only	52.00 mm x 70.00 mm	J8666
	3 1/2" Diskette - Face Only	52.00 mm x 70.00 mm	J8766
	Audio Cassette	42.00 mm x 89.00 mm	J8655
	Audio Cassette	42.00 mm x 89.00 mm	L7655
	Videotape Face	46.40 mm x 76.20 mm	J8671
	Videotape Face	46.40 mm x 76.20 mm	L7671
	Videotape Spine	16.93 mm x 144.78 mm	J8674
	Videotape Spine	16.93 mm x 144.78 mm	L7674
	CD Label	114.30 mm x 114.50 mm	L7660
	Small Label	21.20 mm x 38.10 mm	C2180
	Full Page Sticker	246.20 mm x 246.20 mm	C2245
Name Tags (Projects > Forms > Labels)	Big Round Sticker	71.95 mm x 71.95 mm	C2244
	Name Badge	55.00 mm x 86.00 mm	L7418
Tickets (Projects > Cards > Tickets)	See Business Cards	—	—


Colored Pencil effect
Colored Pencil

Colored Pencil draws an image using colored pencils on a solid background. Important edges are retained and given a rough crosshatch appearance; the solid background color shows through the smoother areas.

Original	Colored Pencil

•  The Pencil Width setting controls the thickness of the crosshatching. You can set a value from 1 to 24.

•  The Stroke Pressure setting controls how much of the paper shows through the pencil strokes. You can set a value from 0 to 15; lower values show more of the paper.

•  The Paper Brightness setting controls the brightness of the paper color. You can set a value from 0 to 50.

Note: The background or "paper" area that shows through is determined by the Background color. For more information, see Choose Colors.